JP2016049286A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with a penalty function that prevents a fraudulent profit gain by a player but at the same time prevents an unpleasant feeling to be given to the player.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: addition determination means of notification game number for determining whether or not to add the notification game's number of unit games during a standby state of a special game; and penalty flag setting means for setting a penalty flag to an ON state when a fraudulent operation is detected. When the penalty flag is in an ON state, a probability where an addition of the notification game's number of unit games is determined by the addition determination means of notification game number becomes lower than that of the penalty flag in an OFF state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Output a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege granted to a player, a replay (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming game media An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a gaming machine having a function of assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like (see, for example, Patent Document 1) ) Has been developed. Furthermore, conventionally, in addition to the AT function, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than normal is activated, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”). A gaming machine is also being developed.

  Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine having an AT function for notifying the pressing order of stop buttons. In addition, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, when the push order of the stop buttons is other than a predetermined push order (the order of the left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button), the AT function is activated as a penalty. It is a configuration that does not let you.

JP 2013-236911 A

  As described above, conventionally, a gaming machine having a penalty function has been proposed. However, if the penalty becomes excessive, the player may be uncomfortable. In addition, with the diversification of game play in recent years, there may be a situation that cannot be handled by the conventional penalty function. Therefore, when such a problem occurs, there is a possibility of causing damage to the game shop.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a penalty that can prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable while preventing an illegal profit acquisition by the player. It is to provide a gaming machine with a function.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit for controlling the operation;
A plurality of effect devices capable of notifying the player of information relating to the game and a circuit for controlling the effect devices, and a sub-control unit for effecting the game,
The main control unit
A loading operation detecting means (for example, a medal sensor described later) for detecting a gaming medium loading operation;
Start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 79 described later) for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal lottery processing described later) for determining an internal winning combination based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
A variable display device (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a stepping motor, which will be described later), which is composed of a plurality of display rows and displays the symbols necessary for the game in a variable manner based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. )When,
A data transmission means (for example, a main control circuit 91 described later) for controlling the variation display operation of the symbols by the variation display device and transmitting data (for example, various commands) as the game progresses;
Game operations performed in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a state between 2 MB flags described below) that is triggered by a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “2 MB” described later) determined by the internal winning combination determining means Predetermined game control means for controlling
The sub-control unit
Sub-control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 101 described later) that receives data transmitted from the data transmission means, determines a game effect based on the received data, and controls the operation of the determined effect. )When,
An informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) for informing information for displaying a combination of symbols that gives an advantageous state for a player on a determination line straddling the plurality of display columns;
The sub-control means is
Notification game control means for controlling an operation of a notification game (for example, an AT game described later) in which notification is performed by the notification means over a period of a specific number of unit games in the predetermined game state;
When a specific condition is established in the predetermined gaming state, a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, “push order bell” described later) related to the payout of the gaming medium is placed on the determination line. Determination of whether or not to perform a specific game (for example, “JACGAME” described later) in which the game is continued until the number of times that the information for display is notified by the notification means is executed a specific number of times (for example, 5 times). Special game control means for controlling the operation of a special game (for example, a pseudo BB game described later) for each unit game over a predetermined period;
In the waiting state for the special game, notification game number addition determining means for determining whether or not to add the unit game number of the notification game (for example, direct addition processing described later),
Penalty flag setting means for setting a penalty flag to an on state when an unauthorized operation is detected,
When the penalty flag is in the on state, the probability that the notification game number addition determining means determines the addition of the number of unit games of the notification game is lower than that in the case where the penalty flag is in the off state. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the notification game number addition determining means determines whether or not to add the number of unit games of the notification game using a lottery table,
The lottery table used by the notification game number addition determining means when the penalty flag is in the on state may be provided separately from the lottery table used when the penalty flag is in the off state.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, for example, a penalty can be imposed according to the gaming property, gaming state, gaming situation, etc. of the gaming machine, so that an illegal profit acquisition of the player is suppressed, The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. The reason why this effect is obtained will be described in detail in the description of the embodiment described later.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow figure of RT game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the general (RT0) game state internal lottery table (3 sheets hanging) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example between the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal lottery tables (three pieces hanging) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state (3 sheets hanging) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two pieces) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example between the 2MB flag (RT1) game state internal lottery tables (2 sheets hanging) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 2 MB flag (RT2) gaming state (2 sheets) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 2MB gaming states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 3MB gaming states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination storing area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the carryover combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. 10 is a correspondence table between abbreviations of internal winning combinations used in the control of the sub CPU and abbreviations of internal winning combinations used in the control of the main CPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the race runner MAP lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race information MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the victory object person lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race winning ratio MAP lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race winning ratio MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race winning ratio MAP data table (percent display) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race result lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the after-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB precursor lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the period shortening lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the period shortening lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB period shortening lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the direct addition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of the woman A victory) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa game number acquisition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion generation | occurrence | production lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (1st dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (2nd plate) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (3rd plate) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (4th plate) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (5th plate) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the MAX bet button turn-on / off determination table in non-MB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the MAX bet button turn-on / off determination table in MB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power-on process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the MAXBET insertion process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction | saving priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority drawing-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power-on process performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the electric power interruption detection process performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lamp | ramp control task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sound control task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the mother task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation task management process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the period information display process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the command analysis process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the command sequence check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of initialization command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the race information lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of medal insertion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the variable setting process (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the variable setting process (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of _variable setting process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _ variable setting process in a race in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general end time_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle BB end_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the race end time_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB completion | finish_variable setting process in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the appearance state update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the Bns state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB winning time_Bns state setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB flag_Bns state setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB operation waiting_Bns state setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of _Bns state setting process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of _Bns state setting process in JAC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of _Bns state setting process in ChaBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of _Bns state setting process in ChaJAC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the general_game start in the one Embodiment of this invention (the 1). It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process (the 2) at the time of the general_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo BB lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the general BB_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB entry determination processing (at the time of game start) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BBJAC transfer determination process (at the time of a game start) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB counter management process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a race_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of AT preparation_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of woman A victory_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of Kappa victory_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of AT_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BB_game start in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general_game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of general BB_game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the racing_game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation_game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB_game state setting process during AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the reel stop command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium penalty process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the penalty process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of winning operation command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of general BB_winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB entry determination processing (at the time of winning a prize) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BBJAC transfer determination process (at the time of winning a prize) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a race_winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of BB_winning in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the payout completion command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of no operation command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the button preparation during AT preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the female A_AT start game number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of a race_losing in the modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a race_game start in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of a race_losing in the modification 2. FIG.

  Hereinafter, a pachislot machine will be exemplified as a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachislot machine having an AT function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into a pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as an internal lottery random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). The

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number for internal lottery and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. Note that the types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called “losing” Such a thing is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding piece Set the number to one symbol.

  The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the symbol combination display related to the winning is determined, normally, the symbol combination follows the effective line within a specified time of 190 msec (four symbols). Stop the reel rotation so that it is displayed as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means is, for example, 1 at the time of operation of “MB” (middle bonus) that continuously activates the challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) and “CB”, which are the second type special feature. For one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a specified time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the active line. Let

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed symbol combination is related to winning a prize, a reward such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of gaming operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various effects are performed using it.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as an effect random number value) is extracted separately from the internal lottery random value used to determine the internal winning combination described above. The When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time from lots of effects related to the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the pachislot of the present embodiment is functionally mainly composed of a main control unit that controls various operations related to the progress of the game and the various operations, a sub-control unit that produces a game, and a main control. And a gaming machine housing for mounting the sub-control unit. The main control unit includes a main control circuit (main control board) to be described later and various peripheral devices (various operation buttons, reel units, etc.) connected thereto. The sub-control unit includes a sub-control circuit (sub-control board) to be described later and various peripheral devices (including various effect devices such as a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, and a lamp (LED)) controlled thereby. Below, the content of each component will be described more specifically.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that can be put by a carrier when the pachislot 1 is carried.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display devices) are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (display row) has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 (display device, notification means) are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door 2b, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs an effect by displaying an image.

  A pedestal 12 is provided in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a frame member 13 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The frame member 13 includes a symbol display area 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button attachment portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 and the information display window 14 are provided in the opening portion of the frame member 13, and the stop button attachment portion 15 is provided in the lower portion of the opening portion of the frame member 13.

  The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front (player side) and is disposed on the front side (player side) from the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which three reels 3L, 3C, 3R arranged behind (cabinet 2a side) can be seen through. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel. Two symbols are displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, one symbol (three in total) is placed in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4. ) Is displayed. In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R within the frame of the reel display window 4, It is defined as an effective line (determination line) for determining whether or not a prize is won.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously below the reel display window 4 and is arranged so that the surface direction of the information display surface faces upward. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 13, and has a configuration that cannot be removed from the front surface side of the front door 2b.

  Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet placement portion 17 that faces the information display surface of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. And between the sheet | seat mounting part 17 and the window cover 16, the sheet | seat member (information sheet) in which the information regarding a game was described is arrange | positioned. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as an attachment portion of the information sheet.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window cover 16 cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b, and has a smooth surface free from irregularities and gaps. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the inside of the pachislot 1 via the. The replacement of the information sheet will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the example in which the information display window 14 is formed continuously with the reel display window 4 in the opening of the frame member 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The information display window 14 may not be formed continuously with the reel display window 4. That is, the opening of the reel display window 4 and the opening of the information display window 14 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

  The stop button mounting portion 15 is configured by a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is provided so that the substantially trapezoidal surface faces the front (player side). The substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R pass side by side.

  The three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are one of various devices that are operated by the player. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  In addition to the stop button, the pedestal unit 12 is provided with a medal slot 20, a MAX bet button 21 (bet operating means), a 1 bet button 22 and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player. .

  The medal slot 20 is provided for receiving a medal dropped from the outside on the pachislot 1 by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 20 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited in the pachislot 1. Can do. That is, the pachi-slot 1 has a so-called credit function (game medium storage means).

  The MAX bet button 21 and the 1 bet button 22 are provided in order to determine the number used for one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. The start lever 23 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

  Further, as viewed from the front, a 7-segment display 24 including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The 7-segment display 24 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of paid-outs), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), Digital display. Further, a selection button 25 (chance button) is provided on the right side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The selection button 25 is a button that is pressed by the player when a selection operation such as game play is required. For example, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Women A” winning, which will be described later, this is pressed when the player selects one of two types of AT start game number determination modes (modes). The selection button 25 is connected to a sub-control board 72 described later, and the sub-control board 72 performs detection of pressing of the selection button 25 and control of a selection operation based thereon.

  Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the base 12 of the front door 2b. Each side panel unit has a light source and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The checkout button 27 is provided to draw out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  A waist panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12 of the front door 2b. The waist panel unit 31 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides medals discharged by driving a hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4 are diagrams showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a is a box-shaped member, and has a top plate, a bottom plate, left and right side plates, and a back plate. On the upper side inside the cabinet 2a, for example, a cabinet-side speaker 42 for outputting sound effects is provided.

  A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on one side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 (left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). The cabinet side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described later) attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (described later). 5) and a medal payout count switch (not shown).

  An amplifier board 45 that controls the output of sound from the cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed in the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the interior of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front (player side), the other side of the amplifier board 45 (right side in FIGS. A concentrated terminal board 47 (see FIG. 5 described later) is disposed. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A hopper device 51 (medal paying device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed in the lower part inside the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to a substantially central portion of the bottom plate of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can accommodate a large amount of medals and has a structure capable of discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed and the medals are settled. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout port 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 5 described later). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is disposed at a substantially central portion on the back surface of the front door 2b, and is attached to the front door 2b so that the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) can be opened and closed from the back side. It has been.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is attached with a main control board case 55 in which a main control board 71 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) is housed and three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. It has been. Although not shown, a stepping motor (variation display device) is connected to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  In this embodiment, when the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b, as shown in FIG. 4, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placing portion 17 are exposed on the back surface of the front door 2b. As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17, an information sheet on which information related to the game is described is arranged. The information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened and the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. The When exchanging information sheets, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key switch 56 (see FIG. 5 described later). The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachislot 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55.

  The main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 6 described later) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 1 such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. A specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  On the upper part of the middle door 41 of the front door 2b, a sub-control board case 57 in which a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 5 described later) to be described later is accommodated is disposed. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 has a sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). The sub-control circuit 101 (sub-control means) receives the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 91, determines the effect of the game by displaying the video based on the received command data, and It is a circuit that controls the operation of the determined effect. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a later-described sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later) is disposed on the right side of the sub-control board case 57 when the front door 2 b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board that electrically connects the sub control board 72 and a board provided around the sub control board 72. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board 72, the below-mentioned LED board 62A, 62B etc. are mentioned.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the LED boards 62 </ b> A and 62 </ b> B are provided above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2 b. The LED boards 62A and 62B are various types included in a later-described LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 85 (refer to FIG. 5 described later) according to the effects executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (refer to FIG. 7 described later). The LED is turned on and off, and a blinking pattern is displayed. Further, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A and 62B. For example, although not shown, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes an LED (light emitting means) for turning on and off the MAX bet button 21 and an LED substrate for controlling the operation of the LED. The LED for turning on / off the MAX bet button 21 may be included in the LED group 85. In this case, the operation of the LED is controlled by the LED boards 62A and 62B.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 described later is disposed below the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later). The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores opening / closing history information of the middle door 41. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

  Below the middle door 41, lower speakers 65L and 65R are disposed as shown in FIGS. The lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2) on the back surface of the front door 2b, respectively.

  In addition, a selector 66 and a door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) are disposed above the lower speaker 65L of the front door 2b. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides an appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is disposed on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2 b is viewed from the back side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

  In addition, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided in a region below the reel display window 4 and opened and closed by the middle door 41 as shown in FIG. The door relay terminal board 68 is a board that relays connection wiring between the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 and various buttons and switches, the sub control board 72, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. Yes (see FIG. 5 below). Examples of the various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 21, a 1 bet button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot 1.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. The pachi-slot 1 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 56, a cabinet-side relay board 44, and a power supply 53 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes an external concentrated terminal plate 47 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44, a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75. In addition, since the structure of the external concentration terminal board 47 and the hopper apparatus 51 was mentioned above, those description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b connected to the main control board 71 and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 68, a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, and a BET switch 77 (bet detecting means) connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. A settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch substrate 80, a game operation display substrate 81, and a sub-relay substrate 61. Since the selector 66, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 or the 1 bet button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 19L, 19C, 19R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 is connected to the 7-segment display 24, and is inserted when the insertion of medals is accepted, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, and when replaying is performed. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the 7-segment display 24. In addition, an LED 82 is connected to the game operation display board 81, and the LED 82 lights, for example, a mark for displaying a game start or a mark for performing a replay based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81. .

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. The pachislot machine 1 also includes a sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61. Since the LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, description thereof will be omitted here.

  The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to a speaker group including lower speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown).

  The pachi-slot 1 has a ROM cartridge substrate 86 (second storage means) and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 connected to the sub-control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing production image (video), sound, light (LED group 85) and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98 and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel. It is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 101 mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM (DRAM: Dynamic RAM) 103 (first storage means), a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, a driver 106, an SRAM (Static RAM) 107, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 108.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. Various programs for executing are included. In addition, the control program includes a drawing control task (animation task) for controlling the display of the video by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined production content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output from the light source such as the LED group 85, Various programs for executing a sound control task for controlling the sound output from the speakers 65L and 65R are also included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the content of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes a speaker group such as speakers 65L and 65R to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  The SRAM 107 is a storage device that is used as a backup RAM and backs up predetermined data in the sub RAM 103. The RTC 108 is a date and time measuring circuit.

<RT game state transition flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, various RT gaming states controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, three types of RT0 gaming state to RT2 gaming state are provided as RT gaming states, which are different from each other in the type of internal winning combination related to replay and the winning probability thereof. Note that the RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to replay is low, and both the RT1 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state have a high probability of winning the internal winning combination related to replay. Is a gaming state.

  The RT0 game state is an RT game state set in the initial state, and the number of inserted medals (multiplier) for each unit game is 2 (first number) or 3 (second number). State. Note that, in the RT0 gaming state, information indicating that the player is instructed to multiply the number of medals by 2 is notified (the suggestion of two medals is performed).

  Then, in the RT0 gaming state, when a middle bonus (special internal winning combination) having a name “2MB”, which will be described later (internal winning (established) only in a two-seat game), is won, as shown in FIG. 8, the RT gaming state Shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. In addition, in the RT0 gaming state, when a middle bonus with a name “3MB” described later, which is won (established) only when playing three cards, is won, the RT gaming state is changed from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 Transition to gaming state.

  In the RT1 gaming state, the number of inserted medals (multiplier) for each unit game is 2 or 3, but information indicating that the player is instructed to multiply the number of medals by 3 is notified. (Three hints are given), so three-games are mainly played. In this case, since the bonus of “2 MB” won when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state is a bonus that is awarded only when the number of medals is two, in the RT1 gaming state, the bonus of “2 MB” The game is played with the bonus carried over. Therefore, in the following, the RT1 gaming state is also referred to as “a state between 2 MB flags”. In a game between 2 MB flags, even if “losing” is won internally, “2 MB” is not won. Note that the main control circuit 91 controls the game operation in the state between the 2 MB flags. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means (predetermined game control means) for controlling the game operation in the state between 2 MB flags (predetermined game state).

  However, in the RT1 gaming state, when two games are played and a bonus of “2 MB” is won, the corresponding bonus game is activated. Note that in the “2 MB” bonus game, two-games are played, and when the number of medals paid out exceeds two, the “2 MB” bonus game ends. When the bonus game of “2 MB” is consumed, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state as shown in FIG.

  In the RT2 gaming state, the number of inserted medals (multiplier) per unit game is two or three, but since three hints are suggested, three-ply games are mainly performed.

  In the RT2 gaming state, a game of three cards is played, and when a bonus of “3 MB” is won, a corresponding bonus game is activated. Note that in the “3 MB” bonus game, two-games are played, and when the number of medals paid out exceeds 30, the “3 MB” bonus game ends. When the bonus game of “3 MB” is consumed, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, in the RT2 gaming state, it is also possible to play a game with the bonus of “3 MB” won when the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state is also referred to as “3MB flag inter-state”.

  In this embodiment, in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state) or the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 gaming state), the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is three (predetermined) In the case where the player has pressed the MAX bet button 21, the bet operation (insertion operation) of medals cannot be performed. That is, in the state between 2 MB flags or the state between 3 MB flags, when the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is 2 or less, the player presses the MAX bet button 21. Even if the button is pressed, the operation is treated as invalid.

  In the state between the 2MB flags, when the total number of credits and inserted medals is 2, if the player's MAX bet operation is enabled, a two-game is performed and the carry-over is in progress. There is a possibility that "2MB" will win. In this case, since the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, as in the present embodiment, in the state between the 2 MB flags, when the total number of credits and inserted medals is 2 or less, the player's MAX bet operation is invalidated, thereby It is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to a disadvantageous gaming state against the intention.

  In the present embodiment, not only in the state between 2 MB flags and the state between 3 MB flags, but also in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the total number of credits and inserted medals is less than three The player's MAX betting operation may be invalidated.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 9) that specifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, the symbol counter value “0” corresponds to the value of the symbol counter in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (the direction from symbol position “19” in FIG. 9 toward symbol position “0”). “0” to “19” are assigned to the symbols as symbol positions.

  That is, by referring to the symbol counter values (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of design. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “7”, the symbol position “8” is set in each of the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L within the frame of the left display window 4L. The symbol “yellow BAR”, symbol “watermelon 1” at symbol position “7”, and symbol “orange” at symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a symbol combination (combination and combination name) determined in advance according to the type of bonus (bonus, small role, replay), the content (storage area, data) and payout of the corresponding display symbol code. Define the correspondence with the number of sheets.

  In this embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, a prize is awarded. It is determined. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given a privilege such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, and bonus operation. If the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “lost”. In other words, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “losing”. The present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol combination “losing” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define the symbol combination “losing”.

  Various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  Further, the “storage area” data in the display combination code column is data for designating a later-described symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later) in which the corresponding symbol combination data is stored. In this embodiment, 15 symbol code storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the difference in “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In a symbol combination to which a value of 1 or more is assigned as the “payout number” data, medals of the same number as that number are paid out. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination related to the combination name “CT Bell” is determined for the number of inserted three medals, the symbol combination related to “CT Bell” is stopped and displayed on the active line. ), 10 medals are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name “CT Lip” is determined (when the symbol combination related to “CT Lip” is stopped and displayed on the active line), the replay is activated. To do. Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name “3MB” or “2MB” (when the symbol combination related to “3MB” or “2MB” is stopped and displayed on the active line) is determined. MB (middle bonus) is activated.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, “0” is defined in the “3 sheets” column of “3 MB”, but no number is defined in the “2 sheets” field. . In addition, “0” is defined in the “2 sheets” column of “2 MB”, but numbers are not defined in the “3 sheets” column. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination (display combination) of “3 MB” is valid (winning) only when 3 cards are applied, and is invalid (lost) when 2 cards are applied. In addition, the symbol combination (display combination) of “2 MB” is valid (winning) only when 2 cards are applied, and is invalid (lost) when 3 cards are applied.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, an internal lottery table is provided separately for each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (state between 2 MB flags), the RT2 gaming state (state between 3 MB flags), and the MB gaming state. Furthermore, in each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (between 2 MB flags) and the RT2 gaming state (between 3 MB flags), the number of medals multiplied (2 or 3) A lottery table is provided.

  Each internal lottery table includes a winning number (internal winning combination), a lottery value (winning probability) when each winning number is determined, and a data pointer (small role / The correspondence relationship with the replay data pointer and bonus data pointer) is defined. For convenience of explanation, the abbreviation of the internal winning combination is also described in the internal lottery table referred to when the medal multiplication number is 3 shown in FIGS. In addition, in the internal lottery table referred to when the number of medals multiplied by 2 and the internal lottery table referred to during the MB gaming state shown in FIGS. Description of the name and data pointer is omitted.

  In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles set in advance. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, random numbers for internal lottery (external random values) extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) are defined corresponding to each winning number. Subtract sequentially by lottery value. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether the result of the subtraction has become negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of subtraction becomes negative (a “digit” occurs) at a predetermined winning number, the winning number (internal winning combination) is won.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the greater the number specified as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data pointer is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by “the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random denominator: 65536)”.

(1) General (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 hangs)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of a general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three pieces). This general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three) is referred to when the number of medals for a unit game is three in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 cards) defines the relationship between winning numbers “1” to “58” (various internal winning combinations), corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities) and data pointers. To do.

  For example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when setting 1 of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 cards) is referenced, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2MB”) is won. The probability of being “0” is “0”. On the other hand, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when reference is made to setting 1 in the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 cards), the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is won. The probability of performing is “17200/65536 (1 / 3.8)”. In this case, “0” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “2” is acquired as the bonus data pointer. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game with three cards is played in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), only “3 MB” is won as a bonus.

  Also, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when referring to the setting 1 of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 cards), the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “normal lip 1”) The probability of winning “)” is “374/65536 (1 / 175.2)”. In this case, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

(2) Between 2 MB flags (RT1) Game state internal lottery table (3 hangs)
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an internal lottery table (3 sheets) for a 2 MB flag (RT1) gaming state. This internal lottery table for 2 MB flags (RT1) gaming state (3 cards) is referred to when the number of medals for a unit game is 3 in the 2 MB flag status (RT1 gaming status). Between the 2 MB flags (RT1) gaming state internal lottery table (3), the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery value (winning probability) and data pointer Is specified.

  For example, in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 2 MB flags (RT1) gaming state (3 cards) is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2 MB”) ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a game with three cards is performed in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 game state), the bonuses of “2 MB” and “3 MB” are not won.

  Also, for example, in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state), when referring to setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 2 MB flags (RT1) gaming state (3 cards), the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “ The probability that “normal lip 1”) wins is “2048/65536 (1/32)”. In this case, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

  Note that the winning probabilities of winning numbers “4” to “16” in the internal (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three) shown in FIG. 13 and the 2 MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal shown in FIG. As is apparent from comparison with those in the lottery table (3 sheets), the winning probability of the replay combination in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state) is higher than that in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state).

(3) Between 3MB flags (RT2) Game state internal lottery table (3 hangs)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for 3 MB flags (RT2) gaming state (3 sheets). The internal lottery table for 3 MB flags (RT2) gaming state (3 cards) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied per unit game is 3 in the 3 MB flag status (RT2 gaming state). Between 3 MB flags (RT2) game state internal lottery table (3), the relationship between winning numbers “1” to “58” (various internal winning combinations), corresponding lottery value (winning probability) and data pointer Is specified.

  For example, in the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when setting 1 in the internal lottery table for 3 MB flags (RT2) gaming state (3 cards) is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2 MB”) ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is “0”. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a game with three cards is performed in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), the bonuses of “2MB” and “3MB” are not won.

  Also, for example, in the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when referring to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 3 MB flags (RT2) gaming state (3 cards), the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “ The probability that “normal lip 1”) will win is “500/65536 (1/131)”. In this case, “1” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “0” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

  Note that the winning probabilities of the winning numbers “4” to “16” in the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (three) shown in FIG. 13 and the 3 MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those in the lottery table (3 cards), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB flag state (RT2 gaming state) is higher than that in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). Further, the winning probabilities of the winning numbers “4” to “16” in the internal lottery table for 2 MB flags (RT1) gaming state (3) shown in FIG. 14 and the 3 MB flag (RT2) gaming state shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those in the internal lottery table (three), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB flag state (RT2 gaming state) is lower than that of the 2MB flag state (RT1 gaming state). Become.

(4) General (RT0) game state internal lottery table (2 hangs)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of a general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two pieces). This general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets) is referred to when the number of medals for a unit game is 2 in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two) determines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “5” (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). Note that the internal winning combination of the name “two bells” in FIG. 16 corresponds to all small combinations.

  For example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when reference is made to setting 1 in the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets), the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2MB”) is won. The probability of performing is “26000/65536 (1 / 2.52)”. On the other hand, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when reference is made to setting 1 of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets), the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is won. The probability of being “0” is “0”. In other words, in the present embodiment, when two games are played in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), only “2 MB” is won as a bonus.

  Also, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when referring to setting 1 of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets), the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “normal lip 1”) The probability of winning “)” is “8978/65536 (1 / 7.3)”.

(5) Between 2 MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for gaming state (2 cards)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for 2 state (RT1) gaming state (two pieces). The internal lottery table for 2 MB flag (RT1) gaming state (2 sheets) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied per unit game is 2 in the 2 MB flag state (RT1 gaming state). The 2 MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal lottery table (2 cards) defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “5” (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). . For example, the name “2MB + 2 bells” in FIG. 17 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination of the name “2 bells” (all small roles) wins while “2MB” is carried over.

  For example, in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state), when setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 2 MB flags (RT1) gaming state (2 cards) is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2 MB”) ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, when two games are played in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 game state), the bonuses of “2 MB” and “3 MB” are not won.

  Also, for example, in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state), when referring to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 2 MB flags (RT1) gaming state (2 cards), the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “ The probability of winning 2MB + normal lip 1)) is “32978/65536 (1 / 1.99)”.

  Note that the winning probability of the winning number “4” in the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two) shown in FIG. 16 and the 2 MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is clear from the comparison with that of 2 sheets, the winning probability of the replay role in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state) is higher than that of the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state) even in the game of 2 sheets. Become.

(6) Between 3MB flags (RT2) Internal lottery table for gaming state (2 cards)
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (2 sheets) for the 3 MB flag (RT2) gaming state. The internal lottery table for 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state (2 sheets) is referred to when the number of medals to be multiplied per unit game is 2 in the 3MB flag state (RT2 gaming state). The 3 MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal lottery table (2) is used to define the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “5” (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). . For example, the name “3MB + 2 bells” in FIG. 18 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination of the name “2 bells” (all small roles) is won while “3 MB” is carried over.

  For example, in the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 2 MB flag (RT2) gaming state (2 cards) is referred to, the winning number “2” (internal winning combination “2 MB”) ) Or the winning number “3” (internal winning combination “3MB”) is “0”. In other words, in the present embodiment, when two games are played in the 3 MB flag state (RT2 gaming state), the bonuses of “2 MB” and “3 MB” are not won.

  Also, for example, in the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when referring to the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for 2 MB flag (RT2) gaming state (2 cards), the winning number “4” (internal winning combination “ The probability of winning 3MB + normal lip 1 ”) is“ 8980/65536 (1 / 7.3) ”.

  Note that the winning probability of the winning number “4” in the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two) shown in FIG. 16 and the 3 MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is clear from the comparison with that of 2 sheets, the winning probability of the replay role in the 3 MB flag state (RT2 gaming state) is higher than that of the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state) even in the case of 2 sheets of gaming. Become. Also, the winning probability of the winning number “4” between the 2 MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets) shown in FIG. 17 and the 3 MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. As is clear from the comparison with that of (2 cards), even in the game of 2 cards, the winning probability of the replay role in the 3 MB flag state (RT2 game state) is the same as that of the 2 MB flag state (RT1 game state). It will be lower.

(7) 2MB gaming state internal lottery table FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration of a 2MB gaming state internal lottery table. The internal lottery table for 2 MB gaming state is referred to when the middle bonus “2 MB” is activated (when the gaming state is the 2 MB gaming state). The internal lottery table for 2 MB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” and “2” and the corresponding lottery values (winning probabilities).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is the 2MB gaming state, an internal winning combination with the name “CB combination” is always won. The internal winning combination with the name “CB combination” corresponds to all small combinations.

(8) 3MB gaming state internal lottery table FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration of a 3MB gaming state internal lottery table. The internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state is referred to when the middle bonus “3MB” is activated (when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state). The internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” and “2” and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state, an internal winning combination with the name “CB combination” is always won.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination determination table defines a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the effective line (center line). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the active line based on the symbol combination determination table, that is, the type of display combination that can be won is determined uniquely. Is done. The black circles in each symbol combination determination table indicate symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the effective line (center line) in the winning internal winning combination.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is “normal lip 1”, the names “CT lip”, “CU lip”, “bell lip 1” to “bell lip 8”, “BTBAR1” to “BTBAR6”, “CTSVN1”, The symbol combination of “CTSVN2”, “CDSVN2” and “CDSVN3” can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is “213 bell 1”, the symbol combination “CT bell” and “control combination 1” to “control combination 10” can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is the combination of the name “CB combination”, the symbol combinations of all the small combinations can be stopped and displayed.

  In the symbol combination determination table, the case where the “internal winning combination” is “lost” is not defined, but this is the case for all symbols defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. Indicates that combination display is not allowed.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 95 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters and the like used for various reel effects (various game locks).

[Internal winning combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the internal winning combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the internal winning combination storing area is composed of internal winning combination storing areas 0 to 7 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the internal winning combination storing areas 0 to 7, when “1” is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has been internally won. In the internal winning combination storage area shown in FIG. 24, the storage areas corresponding to the internal winning combinations of the names “two bells” and “CB combination” are not defined, but when these internal winning combinations are won “1” is stored in the storage area (bit) of all internal winning combinations related to the small combinations.

[Display combination storage area]
Next, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 0 to 7 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storing areas 0 to 7, when “1” is stored in a predetermined bit, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the active line. .

[Coverage storage area]
Next, the configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the carryover combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

  As a result of the internal lottery, when either “2 MB” or “3 MB” is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area as the carryover combination. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming state flag storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit in the gaming state flag storage area.

  When “1” is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area, it indicates that the middle bonus “2 MB” is activated and the gaming state is the 2 MB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 19L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 19L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 93 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pressing order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area and stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte.

  In the pressing order flag, the type of stop button pressing order is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the symbol code storage area is composed of symbol code storage areas 0 to 14 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In the symbol code storage area, “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the display combination (design combination) that can be stopped on the active line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 0 to 14.

<Various sub game states>
Next, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, various sub game states related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 game state) will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as the sub gaming state in the state between the 2 MB flags, there are mainly states called “non-AT state”, “AT ready state”, “AT state”, and “pseudo BB (Big Bonus) state”. It is done. The game in the “pseudo BB state” is performed as an interrupt process when winning a pseudo BB lottery performed in the “non-AT state”, “AT ready state”, and “AT state”.

  Further, in this embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, as a sub gaming state in the state between the 2 MB flags, a state called “W chance state” that can be shifted from the “AT state”, “AT state” or “ A state referred to as an “addition challenge state” that can be shifted from the “pseudo BB state” is also provided. Hereinafter, the contents of each sub game state will be specifically described.

  As will be described below, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in various sub-gaming states during the 2MB flag state, will receive a predetermined benefit (non-AT state cycle reduction or number of AT games added when “losing” is won. ). And this privilege provision function is controlled by the sub-control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as a means (privilege determination means) for determining whether or not to give a predetermined privilege when “losing” is won.

[Non-AT state]
The non-AT state includes a “normal state” and a “transition effect state” to the AT state. In the non-AT state, basically, the game in the normal state and the transition effect state is periodically repeated with a predetermined number of unit games (190 games in the present embodiment).

  Specifically, in a one-cycle game in a non-AT state, first, a normal game (hereinafter referred to as “normal game”) in which the number of games in one set is 180 games (first unit game number) is played. Is called. Next, after the normal game is digested, a game in a transition effect state (hereinafter referred to as “transition effect game”) is performed over a period of ten games.

  Then, AT lottery is performed at the start of the transition effect game, and if the lottery result is AT winning, an effect corresponding to the AT winning is performed during the transition effect game period, and then the sub gaming state is the AT ready state. Migrate to On the other hand, if the result of the AT lottery is AT non-winning, an effect corresponding to AT non-winning is performed during the transition effect game period, and then the next set of normal games (non-AT state games in the next cycle) is performed. Be started.

  As described above, when the AT lottery result in the transition effect game is non-winning, the normal game and the transition effect game are periodically repeated with a predetermined number of games (190 games). In this periodic game digestion process, basically, after normal game digestion (after 180 game digestion), a chance to shift to the AT state is always given. That is, in the non-AT state, a chance to shift to the AT state periodically is given. Hereinafter, the contents of the normal game and the transition effect game will be described in more detail.

(1) Normal game In normal game, based on the internal winning combination for each game (for each unit game), a winning / non-winning lottery (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo BB game”) (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo BB game”). Is called “pseudo BB lottery”.

  In the normal game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. During the pseudo BB game, the number of games in the normal game is not counted (subtracted). When the pseudo BB game is consumed, the sub game state returns to the normal state. At this time, the normal game is resumed from the state before the start of the pseudo BB game.

  In a normal game, “losing” or a specific internal winning combination (in this embodiment, “normal lip”, “weak choi”, “strong choi”, or “rare role”) is won internally once. In this case, or in the case of continuous winning, a subtraction lottery of the number of remaining games of the current game of the current set, that is, a shortened lottery of the game period in the non-AT state of the current cycle (hereinafter referred to as “cycle shortened lottery”) is performed. Therefore, if the period shortening lottery is won in the normal game, the period until the transition effect game is started is shortened in the non-AT game period of the current cycle. That is, there is a possibility that the period until the game in the AT state starts will be shorter.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of remaining games in the current set of normal games is a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of unit games: 10 games in the present embodiment), in the case of winning a cycle shortened lottery Is calculated by subtracting the number of abbreviated games (the number of subtractions) from the number of remaining games in the normal game of the current set. In this case, if the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games) (the subtraction result may be a negative value), the absolute value of the number of games of the subtraction result is an excess shortened game in the current set. Stocked as a number (number of surplus unit games). On the other hand, in the case of a normal game in a period in which the number of remaining games of the current game in the current set is less than a predetermined number of games (10 games), when the number of shortened games is won, As stock.

  For example, when the predetermined number of games is 10, the remaining number of games in the current set of normal games is 30, and the number of shortened games won is 50, the subtraction result is −20 games. Therefore, the number of games stocked as the surplus number of shortened games is 20 games. At this time, the standard of the number of shortened games stocked as the surplus is set as the predetermined number of games (10 games), and corresponds to the difference between the predetermined number of games (10) and the subtraction result value (−20). The number of games to be played (30 games) may be the surplus number of shortened games. Also, for example, if the predetermined number of games is 10, the number of remaining games of the current set of normal games is 5, and the number of shortened games won is 50 games, The number of games to be stocked is 50 games.

  The excess number of shortened games stored is applied at the start of a game in the non-AT state of the next cycle, that is, at the start of the normal game of the next set, and at that time, the game period in the normal state (non-AT state) Is shortened. In this case, in the next period non-AT game period, the period until the transition effect game is started is shortened. That is, as a result of the cycle shortening lottery, when a surplus number of shortened games is generated, the period until the start of the game in the AT state may be shortened even in the next cycle. Further, for example, depending on the number of shortened games (number of stocked shortened games) obtained by the cycle shortening lottery, the transition effect game may be started from the beginning in the non-AT game period of the next cycle.

(2) Transition effect state In the transition effect game, the effect (notification) game indicating the result (winning / non-winning) of the AT lottery performed at the start of the game period is a specific number of games (third unit game number: book) In the embodiment, it is performed over 10 games). In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in the transition effect game, an effect (race effect) in which a plurality of teammate characters and enemy characters race is performed as an effect indicating the result of the AT lottery. This race effect is performed mainly by displaying a race video on the liquid crystal display device 11. Here, the content of the race effect (transition effect to the AT state) performed in the transition effect game will be described more specifically.

  Specifically, first, a lottery (race result lottery) of whether or not a predetermined ally character set in advance as a race victory target (candidate) wins the race at the start of the race production (transition production game). Do. In this race result lottery, when a predetermined ally character wins the race, the player wins an AT. When the predetermined ally character wins a race, the player wins an AT.

  In addition, at the start of the race effect (transition effect game), a plurality of ally characters including a predetermined ally character set as a race victory target (candidate) person and an enemy character are used as race members, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is displayed. Then, during the game period of the race effect, when the AT wins, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs a video effect that the predetermined ally character wins the race, and when the AT is not wins, the video effect that the enemy character wins the race is displayed. This is performed by the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Therefore, if a predetermined teammate character wins as a result of the race effect performed in the transition effect game, the sub game state shifts from the transition effect state to the AT ready state, and if the enemy character wins, the next set ( The next game) normal game (non-AT game) is started. In this embodiment, the number of basic stay games in the AT state to be performed thereafter changes according to the type of the teammate character who won the race. This will be described in detail later.

  In the present embodiment, six types of “male A”, “male B”, “female A”, “kappa”, “tengu”, and “male A / male B” are provided as friend characters. Note that the information on the type of teammate character that will be the race victory target (candidate) in the race production of the transition production game and the content of the race production related to the race win rate of the teammate character is the race in the non-AT game of the current cycle. When information related to the contents of the performance is not set (when the race starter MAP described later is not set (initial state) or when the race information MAP data described later is “0”), the non-AT state of the current cycle It is determined by lottery at the start of the game (at the start of the game period of the normal game). At this time, in this embodiment, not only information related to the content of the race effect of the current set (first race) but also information related to the content of the race effect up to the fourth set (fifth game) is determined.

  In the transition effect game, a pseudo BB lottery is performed based on each game and the internal winning combination. In the transition effect game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and when the pseudo BB game is consumed, the sub game state shifts to the AT preparation state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied in the game period (during the race effect period) in the transition effect state (when the pseudo BB state becomes “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation”: described later. 124), the number of AT games is added and lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined number of additional AT games is acquired.

  The above-described operation control of the normal game and the transition effect game is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for controlling the operations of the normal game and the transition effect game (normal game control means and transition effect game control means).

[AT ready state]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub game state shifts from the transition effect state to the AT state, the sub game state shifts to the AT state via the AT preparation state. In the AT preparation state, a game for determining the number of basic stay games in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as “AT start game number”) (hereinafter referred to as “AT start game number determination game”) is mainly performed. In the AT start game number determination game (notification game number determination game), a pseudo BB lottery is performed based on each game and the internal winning combination.

  In this embodiment, the number of AT start games (the number of basic unit games) is the type of teammate character (“Men A”, “Men B”, “Woman A”, “Kappa”) who has won the race effect of the transition effect game. “Tengu” or “Men A / M B”). Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) When “Men A” wins When “Men A” wins the race production, an AT start game based on the internal winning combination is triggered by the lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game. The number of lotteries is performed, and a predetermined number of AT start games (50 games to 300 games) is determined.

  In this embodiment, the AT start game number may not be determined in the start game of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Man A” victory. In this case, the AT start game number determination game is continued, When the lever of the next game is operated, the number of AT start games is determined again. At this time, the number of continuous AT start game number determination games (in this embodiment, once or twice) varies depending on the internal winning combination determined in the start game of the AT start game number determination game. In the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Man A” victory, a lottery table (not shown) of the AT start game number is appropriately set so that the number of AT start games to be acquired increases as the number of continuations increases. ing.

(2) At the time of “Man B” victory When “Man B” wins the race production, the number of AT start games will be determined by the lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game. A predetermined number of AT start games (50 games to 300 games) is determined. In the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Man B" wins, the number of AT start games is determined in one game. It should be noted that the lottery value of the AT start game number used in the AT start game number determination lottery when “Man B” wins is the same regardless of the internal winning combination.

(3) When “Women A” Wins When “Women A” wins the race production, the number of AT start games is determined by the continuous betting operation of the MAX bet button 21. In the game for determining the number of AT start games when “woman A” wins in this embodiment, two types of AT start game number determination modes (decision modes) are prepared.

  Specifically, the first mode in which 50 AT start games are added by one MAX bet operation, and the second mode in which 5 AT start games are added by one MAX bet operation Is prepared. In both modes, a continuous lottery of the addition process of the AT start game number is performed for each MAX bet operation. The continuation probability is 50% in the first mode, and the continuation probability is 95% in the second mode. Become. The AT start game number determination mode (decision mode) is selected by the player at the start of the AT start game number determination game (AT ready game).

  In the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “woman A” victory, first, at the end of the next game after the liquid crystal display device 11 notifies the victory of “woman A” (after all reels stop), the AT start game Information indicating that the number determination mode (decision mode) is selected is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Next, one of the first mode and the second mode is selected as the AT start game number determination mode by the player's operation on the selection button 25. Next, when the lever operation of the next game of the game in which the selection operation of the AT start game number determination mode is performed is performed, the AT start game number determination mode selected by the player (the first mode or the second mode). Mode) is confirmed (determined). Then, in the game in which the determination operation of the AT start game number determination mode is performed, after the reels are completely stopped, the AT start game number addition process is performed by the continuous bet operation of the MAX bet button 21. That is, the game for determining the number of AT start games when “woman A” wins is performed over two games after the liquid crystal display device 11 informs the victory of “woman A”.

  In the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “Women A” winning, a predetermined number of bets is set for each MAX bet operation until the result of continuous lottery of the AT start game number addition process performed for each MAX bet operation becomes non-winning. The number of AT games (50 games or 5 games) is added to the number of AT start games. It should be noted that the AT start game number is added only at the time of the MAX bet operation when the continuous lottery of the AT start game number addition process is won. Therefore, for example, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of “woman A” victory, the first mode is selected, and the result of the continuous lottery of the AT start game number addition process in the sixth MAX bet operation When is not won, the AT start game number is 250 games.

  When the first mode is selected, if the result of continuous lottery of the AT start game number addition process is non-winning in the first MAX bet operation, the AT start game number is 50 games. Set. That is, when the first mode is selected, the number of AT start games of 50 games is guaranteed. When the second mode is selected, the number of additional games for each MAX bet operation is small, so that a MAX bet operation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 games) is guaranteed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of “woman A” victory, the AT start game number is determined by the continuous hitting operation (continuous hitting lottery) of the MAX bet button 21. However, due to an erroneous operation of the player, for example, the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 is not executed at all, or the player presses the MAX bet button 21 in the middle of consecutive lottery (before the continuous lottery becomes non-winning). There may be a situation where the operation is stopped. In this case, the AT start game number undetermined state occurs.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the above situation occurs, when the start lever of the next game of the AT start game number determination game (AT game start game) is operated, the number of AT start games is increased by an internal process. Is automatically performed, and the number of AT start games when “woman A” wins is determined.

  By providing a recovery function for such an AT starting game number extra lottery process, the AT game can be played before the extra lottery lottery using the MAX bet button 21 is completed due to, for example, a player's erroneous operation. Even if it is started, the profit of the AT game that should be obtained when “woman A” wins is guaranteed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to give a willingness to continue the game.

(4) At the time of “Tengu” victory When “Tengu” wins the race production, as in the case of “Man B” victory, triggered by the lever operation performed at the start game of the AT start game number determination game, The number of AT start games is determined and a predetermined number of AT start games is determined. Also in this case, the number of AT start games is determined in one game.

  However, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Tengu” is won, the number of AT start games of 100 games or more is determined, unlike the case of “Man B” winning (the number of AT start games of 50 games or more is determined).

(5) At the time of “Kappa” victory When “Kappa” wins the race production, the video production of “Kappa” eating sushi (hereinafter referred to as “Kappa Sushi production”) in the AT start game number determination game Displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 over a plurality of games. In this kappa sushi production, every time “Kappa” eats sushi, the number of AT start games is added, and the number of added games (additional unit game number) is added to the sushi (game information) eaten by “Kappa”. Will change accordingly.

  In this embodiment, the types of sushi that "kappa" eats are "squid", "egg", "kappaki", "salmon", "salmon", "tuna", "sea urchin" and "Ise shrimp". 8 types are prepared. And it is set so that the number of additional games increases as the sushi material becomes higher-class.

  Here, the content of the AT start game number determination game (Kappa Sushi production) at the time of “Kappa” victory will be described more specifically. First, when the AT start game number determination game is started, the appearance pattern of the sushi material from the first game to the tenth game (first plate to tenth plate) is determined by lottery, and the determined first plate Images of sushi items up to the 10th dish (hereinafter referred to as “sushi item symbols”) are sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  After that, an effect of eating or not eating sushi from the sushi material in which “kappa” is sequentially displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 for each game, and when the effect of “kappa” eating sushi material is executed, The number of added games is acquired. For example, as shown in the kappa game number acquisition lottery table of FIG. 54 described later, when “kappa” eats the sushi “squid”, 10 or 300 games are added to the AT start game number according to the lottery result. Get as. Also, for example, when “Kappa” eats the sushi story “Ise Shrimp”, 100, 150, 200 or 300 games are acquired as the number of added games depending on the lottery result. Then, the total number of added games corresponding to all the sushi items that “Kappa” has eaten before the AT start game number determination game is ended is set as the AT start game number.

  In the above Kappa sushi production, whether or not to eat sushi material with “Kappa” is determined based on the type of internal winning combination. Specifically, if the internal winning combination is “Group 1” (for example, “213 Bell 1” to “213 Bell 8”, etc.) described later, “Kappa” eats sushi, In the case of an internal winning role, “Kappa” does not eat sushi. In other words, in the period of the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” is won, the number of AT start games is added for each game in which the internal winning combination is “group 1 combination” described later.

  In the present embodiment, the sushi material symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 decreases every time “Kappa” eats sushi material in the production of kappa sushi. However, when the sushi material symbol to be displayed in the 5th game destination (sixth plate) is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, that is, when the sushi material after the sixth game (sixth plate) has not been determined. At this time, the sushi material after the sixth game (sixth plate) is determined by lottery.

  In addition, the end timing of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory is managed by the “Kappa end counter”, and the value of the Kappa end counter (end parameter) is less than “0” (predetermined condition). In this case, the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of winning “Kappa” ends. In this embodiment, the initial value of the kappa end counter is set to “5”.

  The value of the Kappa end counter is decremented by “1” when “Kappa” eats a specific sushi material (sushi material with wasabi), specifically “squid”, “salmon” and “tuna” Is done. In other words, in the current game, the sushi data of “squid”, “salmon”, and “tuna” is set as the sushi material that “Kappa” eats, and the internal winning combination is “Group” described later. In the case of “1 role”, the number of added games corresponding to the sushi material is acquired, but the value of the kappa end counter is subtracted from “1”.

  In this embodiment, when “Kappa” eats a predetermined sushi material, specifically “Kappa Maki”, the value of the Kappa end counter is incremented by “1”. However, in this case, the number of added games is not acquired. That is, in the current game, if the sushi story data of “Kappa Maki” is set as the sushi story of “Kappa” and the internal winning role is “Group 1 role” described later, the addition is performed. Although the number of games cannot be obtained, the value of the Kappa end counter is incremented by “1”, and the AT start game number determination game period is extended.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the Kappa end counter is less than “0” in the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “Kappa” victory, A lottery of the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “Kappa” victory is performed. Specifically, the rebirth lottery is performed by continuously pressing the MAX bet button 21 20 times. At this time, since the revival lottery is performed every time the MAX bet button 21 is pressed, the revival lottery is performed 20 times. When the winning lottery by continuously pressing the MAX bet button 21 is won, the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory is started again, and the number of AT start games can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” is won, the internal winning combination is a specific combination other than “Group 1 combination” described later (“losing”, “reach eye lip”, “weak”). (Che), “Strong Choi”, “Watermelon”, “Chance A”, “Chance B”, and “Decisive Role”) for 5 games from the next game (2nd to 6th dishes) A lottery (data conversion occurrence lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to perform sushi data conversion (see FIG. 55 described later). When the data conversion occurrence lottery of this sushi material is won, in this embodiment, the number of added games associated with the converted sushi material (second added game number information) is the sushi material before conversion ( The sushi material data is converted to a value equal to or greater than the number of added games associated with the first added game number information (see FIGS. 56 to 60 described later).

  In addition, when data conversion of a plurality of sushi items (for five games) after the next game is performed, a plurality of sushi item symbols after the next game displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (of the first added game number information). Images) can be rewritten simultaneously. This sushi material symbol rewriting display operation is performed by call sign data (sushi material symbol rewriting instruction) associated with a predetermined image frame (time frame) in the production sequence data (movie data) of Kappa sushi production. (Including request). Specifically, when call sign data including a request to rewrite the sushi material symbol is detected during the reproduction of the production sequence data of Kappa sushi production, Rewrite display data (second added game number information image) of a plurality of sushi material symbols is acquired at a timing, and rewrite display of a plurality of sushi material symbols after the next game is performed.

  When such a sushi material symbol rewriting display method is used, the timing of the sushi material symbol rewriting display operation is directly registered in the effect sequence data. Therefore, in this case, a special process for synchronizing / adjusting the rewrite display operation in the program is not necessary, so that the rewrite display operation can be executed with a simpler process and the design can be easily changed. In addition, it is possible to construct a program that is less likely to cause problems.

(6) When “Men A / M B” wins In the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Men A / M B” wins the race production, first, as the number of games to be added to the number of AT start games in the first game Ten games are won. Thereafter, the number of additional games that can be acquired for each game (every time) is increased by “10” by the 10th game. That is, in the first game, the second game, the third game,..., The ninth game, and the tenth game, the number of additional games that can be acquired is 10, 20, 30,. Furthermore, the number of additional games that can be acquired after the 11th game is 100 games per game.

  Therefore, for example, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning “MEN A / M B”, when the game is continued up to the tenth game, 550 games are acquired as the AT start game number. Further, when the game is continued after the 11th game, the number of AT start games is increased by 100 games for each game (the number of AT start games is 650 games, 750 games,...).

  In addition, the continuation probability for each game of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Men A / M B” victory is 80%, and when this continuation lottery becomes non-winning, “MEN A / M B” wins The AT start game number determination game at that time ends.

  In the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Men A / M B” wins in this embodiment, continuation confirmation up to the second game is guaranteed. However, if the continuous lottery is not won in the second game, the number of AT start games is 30, but in this case, the number of AT start games is set to 50 games. That is, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Men A / M B” wins, acquisition of the number of AT start games of 50 games is guaranteed at a minimum.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of AT start games that can be acquired when “Tengu”, “Kappa”, or “Men A / M B” wins in the race effect of the transition effect game is “Men A”. , “Man B” or “woman A” is set to be more than that when winning. Therefore, more AT starts when “Tengu”, “Kappa” or “Men A / M B” are included in the running members displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 at the start of the race production of the transition production game. The player can be expected to acquire the number of games.

  The operation control of the above-described various AT start game number determination games is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means for controlling the operation of the AT start game number determination game (notification number determination game control means).

[AT state]
When the AT start game number is determined in the AT ready state game (AT start game number determination game) and the AT ready state game ends, the specific game number (second unit game number: AT start game number + additional AT game) A game in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as “AT game”) in which the order of pushing the small roles is notified for a number of times is started.

  In an AT game (notification game), a pseudo BB lottery is performed based on an internal winning combination every game, and when a pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and the pseudo BB game is digested. Then, the sub gaming state returns to the AT state. At this time, the number of AT games (the number of AT games) is not counted (subtracted) during the pseudo BB game interruption period.

  In addition, in AT games, lottery is added for the number of AT games based on each game, the type of internal winning combination and the winning history of internal winning combinations. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the AT game, when “losing”, “reach eye lip” or “rare role” is won once, or “losing” or “normal lip” is continuously won. In this case, lottery is performed by adding the number of AT games. When the number of AT games is won, the number of added AT games (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the number of currently remaining AT games (number of remaining AT games).

  In addition, in AT games, a predetermined symbol combination (in this embodiment, “black BAR” − “black BAR” − “black BAR” or “black cherry” − “black BAR” − “black BAR”) is on the effective line. If the stop game is displayed, the sub gaming state shifts to the “W chance state”. Then, after the game in the “W chance state” is exhausted, the AT game is resumed. Note that the number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the game period of the “W chance state”.

  In the “W chance state”, a game in which an increase in the payout of medals can be expected. In the game of “W chance state”, the end condition is not the number of digest games, but is performed when a specific small role (“CT bell” in which 10 medals can be paid out) is won internally. It is defined by the number of times the stop button is pressed in order (hereinafter referred to as “bell navigation number”). In other words, in the “W chance state” game, the end condition is managed by the number of bell navigations, and when the number of bell navigations reaches a predetermined number, the “W chance state” game ends. In the present embodiment, the number of bell navigations in the “W chance state” game is set to five.

  Further, in AT games, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (in this embodiment, “yellow BAR” − “yellow BAR” − on the center line (effective line) or on the cross-up) When “yellow BAR” is prepared), the sub game state shifts to “addition challenge state”. Then, after the game in the “add-on challenge state” is digested, the AT game is resumed.

  In a game in the “add-on challenge state”, a pseudo BB game is won and stocked with a high probability over a predetermined number of games. Further, the number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the play period in the “add-on challenge state”.

  When the AT game ends, the sub game state always shifts to the transition effect state, and the transition effect game (race effect) described above is performed. In this case, the information on the type of the teammate character who will be the race victory target (candidate) in the race production of the transition production game and the content of the race production related to the race win rate of the teammate character is obtained at the start of the game in the AT state before the migration. Determined by lottery.

  The above-described operation control of the AT game is executed by the sub control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for controlling the operation of the AT game (notification game control means).

[Pseudo BB state]
In the pseudo BB game (special game), a specific replay role (“Normal Lip 1” to “Normal Lip 8”) is won and the stop button is pressed in correspondence with the replay role. In the case of the predetermined pushing order (when the pushing order is correct), a game called “JACGAME” (specific game) that can be expected to increase the medal payout is executed.

  In the game of “JACGAME”, the stop condition is not a number of digest games, but a stop button that is performed when a specific small role (in this embodiment, “CT bell” capable of paying out 10 medals) is won internally. It is defined by the number of times of push order navigation (number of bell navigations). That is, in the “JACGAME” game, the end condition is managed by the number of times of the bell navigation, and when the number of times of the bell navigation reaches a specific number, the game of “JACGAME” ends. In the present embodiment, the specific number of times of the bell navigation in “JACGAME” is set to five.

  The game period in the pseudo BB state is divided into a period called “JACGAME guaranteed section” and a period called “JACIN challenge section” to be performed thereafter.

  The “JACGAME guaranteed section” is a game period (period is indefinite) in which the game always continues until the predetermined number (in this embodiment, two times) of “JACGAME” is consumed. In the “JACGAME guaranteed section”, when a specific replay combination (“normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8”) is won, the stop button associated with the winning replay combination is displayed. The pressing order is notified (navigated), and execution of “JACGAME” is guaranteed.

  Note that the game form of the “JACGAME guaranteed section” is the same regardless of the transition path from the sub game state to the pseudo BB state. That is, the game form of the “JACGAME guaranteed section” is the same whether the sub gaming state has transitioned from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state or when the sub gaming state has transitioned from the AT state to the pseudo BB state. On the other hand, the game form of the “JACIN challenge section” varies depending on the transition path from the sub game state to the pseudo BB state.

  In the game of the “JACIN challenge section” when the sub game state transitions from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, a specific replay role (in the specific number of unit games: 10 games in the present embodiment) ( In a game in which “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8” is won, a two-choice challenge effect in the order of pressing the stop button is performed. If the two-choice challenge effect is correctly answered, “JACGAME” is executed as an interrupt process (interrupt game).

  On the other hand, in the game in the “JACIN challenge section” when the sub game state transitions from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, a specific replay role (“normal replies” is played during a specific number of games (10 games in this embodiment). In a game where one of “1” to “normal lip 8” is won, the pressing order of the stop button associated with the winning replay role is always notified (navigated). That is, when the sub gaming state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, “JACGAME” is always executed as an interrupt process if a specific replay role is won in the “JACIN challenge section”. Therefore, in this case, more medals can be obtained compared to the case where the sub gaming state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state.

  In addition, in the pseudo BB game when the sub gaming state transitions from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, the period of the game period in the non-AT state based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination and the winning history of the internal winning combination A shortened lottery is performed. Specifically, in the pseudo BB game when the sub gaming state has transitioned from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, when “losing”, “reach eye lip”, or “rare role” is won internally once, or When “losing” or “normal lip” is continuously won, a cycle shortening lottery is performed. Then, if winning the period shortening lottery, a predetermined number of shortened games (0 to 170 games) corresponding to the winning result is subtracted from the number of remaining games of the current set of normal games. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that a privilege of shortening the game period of the non-AT state in the current cycle can be obtained.

  Furthermore, if the result of subtracting the number of shortened games from the current remaining number of games in the base game is less than “0” in the pseudo BB game, the number of games of the absolute value of the subtraction result is It is stocked as the number of surplus games in the current set. Then, the excess number of shortened games stored is applied at the start of the normal game of the next set, and at that time, the game period in the non-AT state (normal state) is shortened.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game when the sub gaming state is changed from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, the number of AT games is added and lottery is performed based on each game, the type of internal winning combination and the winning history of the internal winning combination. . Specifically, in the pseudo BB game when the sub game state transitions from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, when “losing”, “reach eye lip” or “rare role” is won internally once, or “ When “losing” or “normal lip” is continuously won, the number of AT games is added and lottery is performed. If the winning lottery is won, a predetermined additional AT game number (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the current remaining AT game number. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that a benefit of adding the number of AT games is obtained.

  The above-described pseudo BB game and “JACGAME” operation control are executed by the sub-control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for controlling the operation of the pseudo BB game and “JACGAME” (special game control means and specific game control means).

<Configuration of data table stored on ROM cartridge substrate>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described. The correspondence between the abbreviations of the internal winning combinations used in the various processes controlled by the sub CPU 102 and the various tables to be managed and the names and abbreviations of the internal winning combinations managed by the main CPU 93 described below is shown in FIG. It is as shown in the correspondence table.

[Race runner MAP lottery table]
First, the race starter MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a configuration of a race starter MAP lottery table. Note that the race starter MAP lottery table is, for example, a race starter MAP in a race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later) performed at the start of a one-cycle game in a non-AT state (at the start of normal game). Reference is made in lottery processing (S391) or the like.

  The race starter MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the MAP number (“1” to “39”) of the race starter MAP and the lottery value. Note that the race starter MAP (race information MAP), as will be described later, is the race winning target of the race production from the current cycle to the fifth cycle (from the first race to the fifth race) of the game in the non-AT state ( Data ("1" to "10") for determining candidates are defined.

  In the race starter MAP lottery process using the race starter MAP lottery table, first, a random number value for performance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. Then, the lottery value corresponding to each race starter MAP number defined in the race starter MAP lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the MAP number of the race starter MAP at that time is won. For example, in the race starter MAP lottery process, the probability of winning the MAP number “1” is 1974/32768.

[Race Information MAP Data Table]
Next, the race information MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration of a race information MAP data table. The race information MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the “target table” data acquisition process (S393) in the race information lottery process (described later with reference to FIG. 94).

  In the race information MAP data table, from the current cycle to the fifth cycle for each MAP number of the race starter MAP (race information MAP) determined by the race starter MAP lottery process using the race starter MAP lottery table Data (“1” to “10”: hereinafter referred to as race information MAP data) for determining the race winners (from the first race to the fifth race) is defined. Note that the race information MAP data is data corresponding to the type of “target table” defined in the winning target person lottery table described later (see FIG. 34 described later). Specifically, the race information MAP data “1” to “10” respectively correspond to “target table A” to “target table J” defined in the winning target lottery table described later.

  In the data acquisition process of the “target table” using the race information MAP data table, for example, when the MAP number of the race starter MAP (race information MAP) is “7”, the first to fifth races As race information MAP data, “2” (target table B), “1” (target table A), “2” (target table B), “1” (target table A), “8” (target table H), respectively. ) Is acquired.

[Victory lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the winning person lottery table will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a configuration of a winning subject lottery table. The winning person lottery table is referred to in, for example, a winning person lottery process (S395) during a race information lottery process (described later with reference to FIG. 94).

  The winning person lottery table is for each type of the target table, the race winning persons (“Men A”, “Men B”, “Woman A”, “Kappa”, “Tengu”) And “male A / male B”) and their lottery values. In this embodiment, since the race effect of the transition effect game is performed even after the end of the AT game, the target table determined by the race information MAP data table as shown in FIG. In addition to A to J, a dedicated table “after AT” is also defined.

  In the winning subject lottery process using the winning subject lottery table, first, a random number value for performance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is won. The lottery value corresponding to each race victory subject specified in the subject lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the race winning person at that time wins.

  For example, when the target table A is referenced in the winning person lottery process (when the race information MAP data is “1”), the probability that “Kappa” is the race winning person is 328/32768. Become. However, for example, when the target table G is referred to in the winning subject person lottery process (when the race information MAP data is “7”), the probability that “Kappa” is the race winning subject is 0 / 32768, “Kappa” will not win the race.

[Race win rate MAP lottery table]
Next, the race winning rate MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a configuration of a race winning rate MAP lottery table. Note that the race win rate MAP lottery table is referred to, for example, in a race win rate MAP lottery process (S397) in a race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 to be described later).

  The race win rate MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the race win rate MAP and the lottery value for each set value (1 to 6). In the present embodiment, the race winning rate MAP is “race winning rate 5%”, “race winning rate 10%”, “race winning rate 20%”, “race winning rate 30%”, “race winning rate 50%”, “race winning rate”. 66% "," Race Win Rate 80% "," Race Win Rate 100% "," Race Win Rate 2nd Race 50% "-" Race Win Rate 5th Race 50% "," Race Win Rate 2nd Race 66% "-" Race There are 20 types, "winning rate 5th game 66%" and "race winning rate 2nd game 80%" to "race winning rate 5th game 80%".

  In the race win rate MAP lottery process using the race win rate MAP lottery table, first, a random number for performance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) The lottery value corresponding to each race winning rate MAP specified in the winning rate MAP lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the race win rate MAP at that time is won. For example, when the set value is “1”, the probability that the race win rate MAP of “the race win rate 5th game 50%” wins is 4410/32768.

[Race win rate MAP data table]
Next, the race win rate MAP data table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a configuration of the race win rate MAP data table. FIG. 37 is obtained by rewriting the race win rate data (“1” to “8”) defined in the race win rate MAP data table shown in FIG. 36 into specific win rate values (percent display). The race win rate MAP data table is referred to, for example, in a race win rate data acquisition process (S399) during a race information lottery process (described later with reference to FIG. 94).

  The race win rate MAP data table stores predetermined race win rate data ("1" to "8") for each race win rate MAP determined by the race win rate MAP lottery process. The race win rate data “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8” have a win rate of 5%, a win rate of 10%, and a win rate of 20, respectively. %, Win rate 30%, win rate 50%, win rate 66%, win rate 80% and win rate 100%.

  Specifically, the race winning rate MAP is “race winning rate 5%”, “race winning rate 10%”, “race winning rate 20%”, “race winning rate 30%”, “race winning rate 50%”, “race winning rate 66% ”,“ Race Win Rate 80% ”and“ Race Win Rate 100% ”, only the race win rate data of the race effect in the current cycle (first race) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. Further, when the race win rate MAP is any one of “race win rate second game 50%”, “race win rate second game 66%” and “race win rate second game 80%”, the first and second races Race win rate data for the race (one cycle ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is any one of “race win rate 3rd race 50%”, “race win rate 3rd race 66%” and “race win rate 3rd race 80%”, the first 3 to 3 Race win rate data up to the race (two cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. In addition, when the race win rate MAP is any one of “race win rate 4th race 50%”, “race win rate 4th race 66%” and “race win rate 4th race 80%” Race win rate data up to the race (3 cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. Furthermore, when the race win rate MAP is any one of “the race win rate 50% of the 5th race”, “the race win rate 5% of the 66th race” and “the race win rate 5th of the 80th race”, the first race 5 Race win rate data up to the race (four cycles ahead) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table.

  In the race winning rate data acquisition process using the race winning rate MAP data table, for example, when the race winning rate MAP is “race winning rate 5th race 50%”, the race win rate data of the first to fifth races. "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), "5" (win rate 50%) The

[Race result lottery table]
Next, the race result lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a configuration of a race result lottery table. Note that the race result lottery table is referred to, for example, in a race result lottery process (S745) or the like during a race_game start process described later (see FIG. 124 described later).

  The race result lottery table defines the correspondence between the race result (winning win / non-winning) and the lottery value for each race win rate.

  In the race result lottery process using the race result lottery table, first, a random number for performance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the race result lottery. The lottery value corresponding to each race result (winning win / non-winning) specified in the table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the race result at that time is a win.

[After-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table]
Next, a post-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration of a post-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery table. The post-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery table is referred to, for example, in the post-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery process (S830) in the AT-in-game start time process (see FIG. 128, which will be described later). The

  The post-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery table defines the correspondence between the race win rate and the lottery value. Note that the post-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery table is commonly referred to regardless of the set value (1 to 6).

  In the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process using the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The extracted random numbers for performance are sequentially subtracted by lottery values corresponding to the winning percentages specified in the post-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the winning percentage at that time is won. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the race win rates selected after AT are “win rate 5%”, “win rate 10%”, “win rate 30%”, “win rate 50%”, and “win rate 100”. % ".

[Race winning percentage data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table]
Next, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration of a race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table. The race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table is referred to, for example, in a race win rate data rewriting lottery process (S945) during a general medium penalty process (see FIG. 137 described later).

  The race win rate data rewrite lottery (during penalty) table defines the correspondence between the race win rate after rewriting (including no rewrite) and the lottery value for each penalty counter value ("0" to "5") To do. The value of the penalty counter is the number of illegal operations (for example, ignoring push order navigation) performed during a predetermined game period. In this embodiment, in the race win rate data rewriting lottery process, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table of FIG. 40 is used in common regardless of the currently set race win rate.

  In the race winning rate data rewriting lottery process using the race winning rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table, first, an effect extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random value for the game is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each race winning rate after rewriting defined in the race winning rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the winning rate of the race at that time is won.

  In the present embodiment, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table of FIG. 40 is used regardless of the currently set race win rate, so that the race win rates after rewriting are “no rewrite” and “win rate 0”. One of “%” wins. In other words, in the present embodiment, the race win rate during the penalty is the currently set race win rate or 0% (AT non-winning).

  The configuration of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, the winning type of the race win rate after rewriting may include a predetermined race win rate within a range greater than 0% and less than 5%, in addition to “no rewrite” and “0% win rate”. Instead of “winning rate 0%”, the predetermined race winning rate may be won.

  Further, for example, a race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table may be provided for each currently set race win rate. In this case, a lottery value may be appropriately set in the race win rate column other than “win rate 0%” so that the rewritten race win rate is equal to or less than the currently set race win rate.

  Furthermore, in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table shown in FIG. 40, the probability of decreasing the race win rate (the lottery value of “win rate 0%”) as the penalty counter value (number of illegal operations executed) increases. Although the example of a structure which increases continuously was demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the penalty counter value is “1”, the probability that the race win rate is reduced (the lottery value of “win rate 0%”) is the same as that when the penalty counter value is “2”. Good. In other words, in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table, the probability of decreasing the race win rate (the lottery value of “win rate 0%”) is increased step by step with the increase of the penalty counter value (number of illegal operations). It may be configured such that the number increases.

[Pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table]
Next, the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table. The pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table is referred to, for example, in a pseudo BB lottery process described later (see FIG. 119 described later) when the sub gaming state is a normal state.

  The pseudo BB lottery (medium) table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB game and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

  In the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table, first, a random number for performance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. Then, the lottery value of each lottery result specified in the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result (pseudo BB game winning / non-winning) at that time is won.

  For example, in the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table, if the internal winning combination is “normal lip”, the non-winning of the pseudo BB game is always determined, and the internal winning combination is “determined” In the case of “combination”, the winning of the pseudo BB game is surely determined.

[Pseudo BB lottery (AT, AT preparation, race) table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / race) table will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB lottery (AT during, AT preparation, during race) table. The pseudo BB lottery (AT / AT preparation / during race) table is, for example, in a pseudo BB lottery process described later (see FIG. 119 described later) when the sub gaming state is other than the normal state (sub gaming state). Is in the AT state, the AT preparation state, or the transition effect state).

  The pseudo BB lottery (AT / AT preparation / race) table also has the same configuration as the pseudo BB lottery (general) table, and the pseudo BB lottery process is performed by the same method. Therefore, here, the structure of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table and the explanation of the technique of the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / AT preparation / during race) table Is omitted.

[Pseudo BB sign lottery table]
Next, the pseudo BB precursor lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a pseudo BB precursor lottery table. The pseudo BB precursor lottery table is referred to, for example, in a pseudo BB precursor lottery process (S677) in a pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 119 described later).

  The pseudo BB precursory lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of precursor games (including no precursor) at the time of the pseudo BB game winning and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

  In the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, first, an effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is simulated. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value of each number of precursor games defined in the BB precursor lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” occurs), the number of precursor games at that time is won.

  For example, in the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, if the internal winning combination is “weak”, the number of precursor games of one game is won with a probability of 128/32768, and 512/32768. It wins the number of precursor games of two games with a probability of 32,32768 and wins the number of precursor games of three games.

[Cycle shortened lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, the cycle shortening lottery table will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a configuration of the cycle shortened lottery table (part 1), and FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a configuration of the cycle shortened lottery table (part 2). The cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1 and No. 2) is referred to, for example, in the cycle shortening related process (S661) in the later-described general medium_game start process (see FIGS. 117 and 118 described later).

  The cycle shortened lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games in the normal game) in the non-AT game period (one cycle) and the lottery value for each winning history data of the internal winning combination. . In the cycle shortening lottery table, the number of shortened games is “0”, “5”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “40”, “50”, “60”, “70”, “ 100 "," 150 "and" 170 "are provided.

  Note that the winning history data “losing 2 series” of the internal winning combination in the cycle shortening lottery table (part 1) indicates a case where the internal winning combination “losing” is winning 2 games in succession. The winning history data “Lip Triple” indicates a case where the internal winning combination “Normal Lip” is won for three consecutive games. The winning history data “Bell Triple” indicates a case where the internal winning combination “3 bells” (left 3 bells and middle right 3 bells) has won 3 consecutive games.

  In addition, the winning history data “weak 1st” and “strong 1st” of the internal winning combination in the cycle shortening lottery table (part 2) indicate that the current internal winning combination of the game is “weak” and “strong”, respectively. The case of “Che” is shown. The winning history data “Weak and weak 2” indicates the case where the internal winning combination “Weak Choi” wins two games in a row, and the winning history data “Strong and strong 2” indicates the internal winning combination “Strong”. Shows a case where two games are won in succession. The winning history data “Weak and strong 2” indicates that the internal winning roles “Weak” and “Strong” are consecutively won in this order. The case where the roles “strong Choi” and “weak Choi” are successively won in this order is shown. In addition, the winning history data “rare role triple” includes the internal winning role “rare role” (“weak choi”, “strong choi”, “watermelon”, “chance eye A”, “chance eye B” and “determined role”. ": The specified internal winning combination) indicates that three games have been won in succession.

  In the cycle shortening related process using the cycle shortening lottery table, first, a random number for performance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) is used as the cycle shortening lottery. Subtract sequentially with lottery values for each number of shortened games specified in the table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the number of shortened games at that time is won.

  For example, in the cycle shortening related process using the cycle shortening lottery table, when the winning history data is “3 consecutive losses”, the number of shortened games of 10 games is won with a probability of 30720/32768, and 1600/32768 The winning game number of 30 games is won, and the shortening game number of 50 games is won with a probability of 448/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, even in the normal game, even if the internal winning combination “losing” is continuously won, there is a possibility that a privilege of obtaining the number of shortened games (shortening the game period in the non-AT state) may be obtained.

[Pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table]
Next, the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table. Note that the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table is referred to, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery process (S689) in the later-described general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120 described later).

  The pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table shows the correspondence between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games of the normal game) and the lottery value of the game period (one cycle) in the non-AT state for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. Is specified. In the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table, “0”, “5”, “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “100”, and “170” are provided as the number of shortened games. However, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process, when “170” is won as the number of shortened games, a privilege with a race winning rate of 100% is also obtained.

  In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, first, an effect random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. Then, the lottery value of each shortened game number specified in the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the number of shortened games at that time is won.

  For example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table, when the winning history data is “losing triples”, the number of shortened games of 30 games is won with a probability of 32112/32768, The number of shortened games of 100 games with a probability of 656/32768 is won. That is, in this embodiment, when a pseudo BB game is started during a normal game, even if the internal winning combination “losing” is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state, the number of shortened games is acquired (in the non-AT state). There is a possibility that a privilege of shortening the game period may be obtained. Also, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table, when the internal winning combination is “reach eye lip”, not only the number of shortened games of 170 games is always won, The race win rate set in the current set is updated to 100% race win rate (AT winning).

[Directly placed lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47A to FIG. 47C, the direct addition lottery table will be described.

  FIG. 47A is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a direct addition lottery table that is referred to when the penalty flag is in an off state. FIG. 47B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a directly added lottery table that is referred to when the penalty flag is in an on state and the sub game state is in a transition effect state (“during race” described later). FIG. 47C shows a state in which the penalty flag is on and the sub gaming state is the AT state (described later “AT in progress”) or the pseudo BB game is started in the AT state (described later “AT in progress BB”). It is a figure which shows the structure of the direct addition lottery table referred when it is. That is, when the current game is a penalty game, the directly added lottery table of FIG. 47B or 47C is used, and when the current game is not a penalty game, the directly added lottery table of FIG. 47A. Is used.

  Note that these directly added lottery tables are used during, for example, the following race_game start processing (see FIG. 124) described later, during AT_game start processing (see FIG. 128 described later), and during BB_game during AT. It is referred to when determining the number of AT games to be added in the direct addition lottery process during the start process (see FIG. 129 described later).

  Each directly added lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of added AT games and the lottery value for each internal winning combination or winning history data. In this embodiment, the number of additional AT games is “0” (no additional), “10”, “20”, “30”, “50”, “100”, “150”, “200”, and “200”. 300 "is provided.

  In the direct addition lottery process using the direct addition lottery table, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is directly added and lottery. Subsequent subtractions are sequentially made according to the lottery value of each additional AT game specified in the table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the number of AT games added at that time is won.

  For example, in the direct addition lottery process using the direct addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table shown in FIG. 47A, when the winning history data is “losing triples”, an additional AT of 20 games with a probability of 32636/32768 Win the number of games and add 100 games with a probability of 32/32768 to win the number of AT games. That is, in the present embodiment, when a pseudo BB game is started during an AT game, even if the internal winning combination “losing” is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state, the benefit of adding the number of AT games can be obtained. there is a possibility.

  In addition, for example, in the direct ride lottery process (direct ride lottery process during penalty) using the direct ride lottery (penalty flag ON: during race) table shown in FIG. 47B, the internal winning combination is “reach eye lip” and “determined” If it is other than “combination”, the benefit of adding the number of AT games cannot be obtained. Further, for example, in the direct top lottery process (direct top lottery process during the penalty) using the direct top lottery (penalty flag ON: AT, BB during AT) table shown in FIG. 47C, regardless of the type of the internal winning combination , You can not get the extra benefits of AT games.

[AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48A and FIG. 48B, an AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table will be described.

  FIG. 48A is referred to when the first mode (the continuation probability is 50% and the number of additional games for each MAX bet operation is 50 games) is selected as a mode for determining the number of AT start games when “woman A” wins. It is a figure which shows the structure of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of female A victory) table. FIG. 48B shows the case where the second mode (the continuation probability is 95% and the number of additional games for each MAX bet operation is 5 games) is selected as the mode for determining the number of AT start games when “woman A” wins. It is a figure which shows the structure of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of woman A victory) table referred.

  Note that these AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) tables are referred to, for example, in the female A_AT start game number random determination process (S1062) in the female A_AT start game number determination process (see FIG. 148 described later). Is done. 48A and 48B, the process of selecting one of the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) tables is, for example, the AT during the AT preparation button pressing process described later (see FIG. 147 described later). This is performed in the starting game number lottery table switching process (S1054).

  Each AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table shows the types of lottery results (win (continuation) / non-win (end)) of the AT start game number addition lottery performed each time the MAX bet button 21 is pressed. The relationship between lottery values of lottery results is defined.

  In the female A_AT start game number lottery process using the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The effect random number is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each lottery result type specified in the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result (continuation / non-winning) at that time is won.

  In addition, when the “woman A” win wins the AT start game number addition lottery, the AT game number (5 games or 50 games) corresponding to the selected mode is determined at that time. In addition to the number of games, the execution (continuation) of the AT start game number addition lottery is determined again. On the other hand, if the result of the AT start game number addition lottery at the time of winning “woman A” is non-winning, no AT game number is added, and the AT start game number addition lottery (at the time of “woman A” wins) The AT start game number determination game) is also ended. However, the number of AT games is guaranteed as a minimum guaranteed value of 50 games regardless of the lottery result of the AT start game number addition lottery. Therefore, for example, if the lottery result of the AT start game number addition lottery becomes non-winning (end) when the second mode is selected and the fifth MAX bet 21 is pressed, the number of wins is Since it is four times, when the AT start game number is determined based on the number of corresponding hits, it becomes 20 games (5 games × 4 times), but in this embodiment, the AT start game number is rewritten to 50 games.

[AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table]
Next, an AT start game number lottery (when Kappa victory) table will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52 are diagrams showing the configurations of an AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (part 1) to an AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (part 4), respectively. These AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) tables are referred to, for example, in the Kappa sushi MAP lottery process (S793) in the Kappa win_game start process (see FIG. 127 described later), which will be described later. The

  The AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table defines the correspondence between the sushi MAP number and the lottery value for each sushi MAP number currently set. The sushi MAP is the kappa sushi map MAP corresponding to the sushi material from the first dish to the tenth dish displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the above-mentioned Kappa sushi production (the game for determining the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins). The MAP defines data (see FIG. 53 described later).

  In the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table, “1” to “45” are defined as sushi MAP numbers. In the initial state, the sushi MAP is not set. In this case, the lottery value in the “first time” column in the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table is referenced (see FIG. 52).

  In the kappa sushi MAP lottery process using the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table, first, an effect extracted from a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, 0-32767, random number denominator = 32768). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each sushi MAP number defined in the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result is negative (“digit” is generated), the sushi MAP number at that time is won.

[Kappa Sushi MAP Data Table]
Next, the kappa sushi MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a configuration of a kappa sushi MAP data table. Note that the kappa sushi MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the kappa sushi MAP data acquisition process (S794) in the kappa victory time_game start time process (see FIG. 127, described later).

  In the kappa sushi MAP data table, kappa sushi MAP data (“1” to “1”) corresponding to the first to tenth sushi items specified for each sushi MAP number determined by the kappa sushi MAP lottery process. 8 ") is stored. That is, the kappa sushi MAP data table is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT start game number determination game (kappa sushi production) performed when “kappa” wins in the race production of the transition production game. Types of sushi material from the first game to the tenth game are defined.

  In the kappa sushi MAP data table, the sushi material corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “1” is “squid”, the sushi material corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “2” is “egago”, and the kappa sushi MAP. The sushi material corresponding to the data “3” is “kappaki”, and the sushi material corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “4” is “salmon”. The sushi material corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “5” is “Ikura”, the sushi material corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “6” is “tuna”, and corresponds to the kappa sushi MAP data “7”. The sushi material is “urchin”, and the sushi material corresponding to the kappa sushi MAP data “8” is “Ise shrimp”.

  In the kappa sushi MAP data acquisition process using the kappa sushi MAP data table, for example, when the sushi MAP number is “1”, the kappa sushi MAP data from the first dish to the tenth dish is “ 1 (squid), “1” (squid), “2” (egg), “1” (squid), “4” (salmon), “1” (squid), “2” (egg), “1 "(Squid)," 1 "(squid) and" 5 "(squid) are acquired.

[Kappa game number acquisition lottery table]
Next, the kappa game number acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a configuration of a kappa game number acquisition lottery table. The kappa game number acquisition lottery table is referred to, for example, in the kappa game number acquisition lottery process (S806) in the kappa victory time_game start time process (see FIG. 127 described later).

  The kappa game number acquisition lottery table defines, for each kappa sushi MAP data (“1” to “8”), the correspondence between the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins and the lottery value. In this embodiment, “10”, “20”, “30”, “100”, “150”, “200”, and “300” are provided as the number of AT start games when “Kappa” wins. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery table, for each kappa sushi MAP data (“1” to “8”), a lottery value of “LIFE UP” is also defined. When “LIFE UP” is won, “1” is added to the value of the kappa end counter that manages the end timing of the kappa sushi production (AT start game number determination game).

  In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the kappa game number acquisition lottery table, first, the production random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. Then, each AT start game number or “LIFE UP” lottery value specified in the kappa game number acquisition lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the number of AT start games or “LIFE UP” at that time is won.

  For example, in the case where the set kappa sushi MAP data is “1” (squid) and the video production in which “kappa” eats the sushi story “squid” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the kappa game number acquisition lottery is performed. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the table, the AT start game number of 10 games is won with a probability of 32672/32768, and the AT start game number of 300 games with a probability of 96/32768 is won. For example, if the set kappa sushi MAP data is “3” (kappaki) and “Kappa” eats the sushi story “kappaki”, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays a video effect. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number acquisition lottery table, the AT start game number is not won, but “LIFE UP” is always won.

  Further, for example, when the set kappa sushi MAP data is “8” (Ise Shrimp) and the video production in which “Kappa” eats the sushi story “Ise Shrimp” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the Kappa In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number acquisition lottery table, the AT start game number of 100 games wins with a probability of 27854/32768, and the AT start game number of 150, 200 or 300 games with a probability of 1638/32768 Will win. That is, in this embodiment, in the kappa sushi production performed when “kappa” wins in the race production of the transition production game, when “kappa” is directed to eat high-quality ingredients sushi, Win big AT start games.

[Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table]
Next, the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a configuration of a kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table is referred to, for example, in the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery process (S802) during the Kappa victory_game start time process (see FIG. 127 described later).

  The kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

  In the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table, first, the performance disturbance extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each lottery result specified in the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table, if the internal winning combination is “losing”, the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence is non-winning with a probability of 31130/32768, The occurrence of Kappa sushi data conversion will be won with a probability of 1638/32768.

[Kappa Sushi data conversion lottery table]
Next, the kappa sushi data conversion lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 56 to 60 are diagrams showing the structures of a kappa sushi data conversion lottery (one plate ahead) table to a kappa sushi data conversion lottery (five plates ahead) table, respectively.

  56. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (one dish ahead) table in FIG. 56 shows the sushi (kappa) displayed in the game one game ahead (second dish) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when “Kappa” wins. It is a conversion lottery table of sushi MAP data. 57. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (2 dishes ahead) table of FIG. 57 shows the conversion of sushi items displayed in the 2 games ahead (3rd dish) game from the current game of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory. It is a lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (3 plates ahead) table of FIG. 58 shows the conversion of sushi items displayed in the game of the 3 games ahead (4 plates) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when “Kappa” wins. It is a lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (4 dishes ahead) table of FIG. 59 shows the conversion of the sushi items displayed in the 4 games ahead (5 dishes) game from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when “Kappa” wins. It is a lottery table. The kappa sushi data conversion lottery (five plates ahead) table of FIG. 60 shows the sushi items displayed in the game five games ahead (sixth plate) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when “Kappa” wins. This is a conversion lottery table. Each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table is referred to, for example, in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process (S804) in the Kappa victory time_game start time process (see FIG. 127 described later).

  Each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table corresponds to the kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "8") after conversion and the lottery value for each currently set kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material). Is specified.

  In the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process using each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table, first, a production random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). Are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each converted kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) defined in each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). If the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) after conversion is won.

  For example, in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process using the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (one dish ahead) table, if the currently set kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is “5” (tuna) The kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is converted from “5” (tuna) to “7” (urchin) with a probability of 29492/32768, and the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is “5” with a probability of 3276/32768. (Tuna) is converted to “8” (Ise shrimp).

  As shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, in the present embodiment, in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process, the value of the converted kappa sushi MAP data does not become smaller than the value of the kappa sushi MAP data before the conversion. That is, the number of acquired AT games after conversion does not become smaller than the number of acquired AT games before conversion by the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process. However, for example, when the currently set kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is “8” (Ise lobster), the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process does not convert the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material). .

[MAX bet button on / off determination table]
Next, the MAX bet button on / off determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a configuration of a MAX bet button on / off determination table referred to during non-MB gaming (when the upper limit (valid prescribed number) of medals can be inserted is 3). FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a configuration of a MAX bet button on / off determination table referred to during MB gaming (when the upper limit of the number of medals that can be inserted is 2). These MAX bet button on / off determination tables are referred to, for example, in the LED on / off determination process of the MAX bet button 21 during the medal insertion command reception process (described later with reference to FIG. 95).

  Each MAX bet button on / off determination table includes a combination of the number of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 (0 to 3) and the number of medals credited (0 to 2 and 3 or more). The relationship between the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is defined.

  For example, when the number of inserted medals is 2 and the number of credits of medals is 2 during a non-MB game, the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is “lit” (see FIG. 61), a lighting request is made to the LED of the MAX bet button 21. Also, for example, when the number of inserted medals is 1 and the number of credits of a medal is 1 during non-MB gaming, the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is “off”. (Refer to FIG. 61) A request to turn off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is made. As shown in FIG. 61, when the number of inserted medals is 3 in a non-MB game, the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is “regardless of the number of credits of medals”. It goes off.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, a procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a flowchart shown in FIG. 63 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed or the setting has been appropriately changed, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed. Details of the power-on process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, a medal sensor (not shown), input of the start switch 79, etc. are checked. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random value acquisition process (S4). In this processing, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for internal winning combination lottery and stores the extracted internal random number value for random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. To do. Moreover, in this embodiment, various random numbers for production (0 to 65535 and / or 0 to 255) can be acquired in addition to the random numbers for internal lottery. Various random numbers for production can be obtained as necessary. May be acquired in S4.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for internal lottery extracted in S4. Details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S6). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Also, the start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for effects such as an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a wait process (S8). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 76, which will be described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, rotation of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed. When it is determined that the reel effect (lock effect) is to be performed during the reel acceleration period at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the reel effect pattern and sets the reel effect in the reel rotation start process of S9. Also controls.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed and the internal winning combination. Details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are all stopped, and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12). ). Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the active line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning action command generation and storage process (S14). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Also, the winning action command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. By this processing, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal payout processing (S15). In this process, the hopper device 51 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S13, and medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the display combination, but as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12), when the number of medals inserted is 3, The maximum payout number (payout upper limit) is 10.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs payout end command generation / storage processing (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates payout end command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Also, the payout end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters (not shown) for managing the end timing of the bonus game provided in the main RAM 95 and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is to be ended. Details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S18). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2, and repeats the processes after S2.

[Power-on processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the power-on process performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S21). In this determination process, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

  For example, when the power is turned off, the set value of pachislot 1 (the value at which the payout rate is set in one of six predetermined stages) and the checksum value calculated from the set value are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 95 as backup data. Stored. In the process of S21, the main CPU 93 reads the setting value and checksum value stored in the main RAM 95. Next, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read setting value with the checksum value backed up. If the two thumb values match, the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal in S21 (when S21 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S23 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal in S21 (when S21 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed-up setting value in a predetermined area in the main RAM 95 (S22). As a result, when the backup is normal, the setting value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 95.

  After the processing of S22 or when S21 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a setting change switch (not shown) is in an on state (S23). In S23, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (when S23 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S29 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S23 that the setting change switch is in the ON state (when S23 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a predetermined initialization process at the time of setting change (S24). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 clears the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 95 and also clears the set value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization command generation / storage processing (S25). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The initialization command data includes the presence / absence of setting value change, setting value information, and the like.

  After the process of S25, the main CPU 93 executes a set value change process (S26). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a set value from predetermined 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and sets the set value based on the operation result of the start lever 23 that is operated thereafter. To confirm.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is on (S27).

  In S27, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is on (when S27 is YES), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S27. When the setting change switch is in the on state, it means that the operation of the setting change switch has not been completed. In this case, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S27 until the setting change switch is not in the on state. repeat.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S27 that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (when S27 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S28). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. After the process of S28, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  Here, returning to the processing of S23 again, if S23 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S29).

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal in S29 (when S29 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the set value to the state before the power interruption based on the backup data (S30). After the process of S30, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal in S29 (when S29 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs power-on error processing (S31). In this process, the main CPU 93 displays an error display or the like indicating that the backup is not normal.

  In this embodiment, an error (backup error) that occurs when backup is not normal cannot be canceled by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch, and a new setting change is performed. Canceled.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S41). The determination of whether or not there is an automatic input request is performed by determining whether or not the automatic input counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S41 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S41 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S44 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S41 that there is an automatic loading request (when S41 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an automatic loading process (S42). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared.

  After the processing of S42, the main CPU 93 performs medal insertion command generation storage processing (S43). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of inserted medals and the number of credits.

  After the processing of S43 or when S41 is NO, the main CPU 93 permits medal reception (S44). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 are accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper device 51.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S45). Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-MB gaming state (including an inter-flag state), the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number to “3”. Further, when the gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number to “2”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a MAXBET insertion process (S46). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines validity / invalidity of the MAX bet operation based on the gaming state, the number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number). The details of the MAXBET insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S47). When the main CPU 93 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted in S47 (when S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S52 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the medal acceptance is permitted in S47 (when S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S48). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted. If a medal has been inserted, the main CPU 93 adds “1” to the value of the inserted number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal insertion command generation storage processing (S49). In this processing, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited (S50). When the main CPU 93 determines in S50 that the medal can be inserted or credited (when S50 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S52 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S50 that the medal cannot be inserted or credited (when S50 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S51). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout port 32.

  After S51, when S47 is NO or when S50 is YES, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S52). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the inserted number is set to “2”.

  In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46 and repeats the processes after S46. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S52 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is ON (S53). ).

  In S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is not on (when S53 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46 and repeats the processes after S46. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S53 that the start switch 79 is on (when S53 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S54).

  After the process of S54, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[MAXBET input processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the MAXBET insertion process performed in S46 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 65) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a MAX bet operation has been performed (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 21 has been pressed by the player.

  In S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MAX bet operation has not been performed (when S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion process, and the process is a medal acceptance / start check process (FIG. 65). (Refer to S47).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the MAX bet operation has been performed (when S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether "2MB" or "3MB" is established (winning). It discriminate | determines (S62). That is, the main CPU 93 refers to the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 26) to determine whether or not the current gaming state is the state between 2 MB flags or the state between 3 MB flags.

  In S62, when the main CPU 93 determines that “2MB” or “3MB” is not established (win) (when S62 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S65 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “2 MB” or “3 MB” is established (winning) in S62 (when S62 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the number of inserted medals and the number of credits. It is determined whether or not the sum of (the number of stored sheets) is “3” or more (S63).

  In S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is not “3” or more (when S63 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the MAXBET insertion process. Then, the process proceeds to S47 in the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 65).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S63 that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is “3” or more (when S63 is YES), the main CPU 93 “3” is set to the number of sheets (S64). Then, after the process of S64, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion process, and moves the process to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 65).

  Thus, in this embodiment, even if the player performs a MAX bet operation in the state between 2 MB flags or the state between 3 MB flags, the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits is multiplied by the state between the MB flags. When the number is less than the maximum value “3”, the number of medals is not set. That is, in this case, the MAX bet operation executed by the player is invalidated.

  Here, returning to the process of S62 again, if S62 is NO, the main CPU 93 sets a predetermined number of credited medals (S65). At this time, two or three multiplied sheets are set. Then, after the processing of S65, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion processing, and moves the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 65).

  As described above, in the MAXBET insertion process of the present embodiment, in the inter-MB flag state, based on the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number), the player can determine whether the MAX bet operation is valid / Invalidity determination is performed, and this processing is executed by the main control circuit 91. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs a valid / invalid determination of the MAX bet operation based on the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) in the state between MB flags. Also serves as a betting operation determination means.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) to determine whether or not the gaming state is the MB gaming state (S71).

  In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the MB gaming state (when S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a process during MB operation (S72). As shown in the internal lottery tables for the 2MB gaming state and the 3MB gaming state in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the MB gaming state, the “CB combination”, that is, all the small combinations are always won. Therefore, in the MB operating process, the main CPU 93 turns on all the small combination bits in the internal winning combination storing area (see FIG. 24). Then, after the process of S72, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S71 that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S73). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27), grasps the current gaming state, and determines the type of the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires an internal lottery random number value stored in the random value storage area (S74). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the internal lottery random value (S75).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S75 is less than “0” (negative value) (S76). In S76, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than “0” (when S76 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S79 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S76 that the calculation result is not less than “0” (when S76 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the internal lottery random value and the winning number (S77). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set as the internal lottery random value, and the winning number is incremented by “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S78). When the main CPU 93 determines in S78 that all the winning numbers have not been checked (when S78 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S75 and repeats the processes after S75.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S78 that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when S78 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S80 described later.

  Here, the process returns to S76 again, and if S76 is YES (when a digit is generated in the subtraction process), the main CPU 93 selects the small role / replay data pointer corresponding to the winning number where the digit is generated. And a bonus data pointer is acquired (S79).

  After the processing of S79 or when S78 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 13 to 15 and the like) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small combination / replay data pointer (S80). ). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S81).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S82). In S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S82 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S82 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (when S82 is YES), the main CPU 93 selects the internal lottery table (FIG. 13 to FIG. 13). The internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S83).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S84).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the carryover combination storage area and determines whether the MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) is being carried over (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not carried over (when S85 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S85 that the MB is being carried over (when S85 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT gaming state corresponding to the type of the MB being carried over (S86). . Specifically, when “2 MB” is being carried over (between 2 MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT state (bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27)). ("1" is stored (set)). On the other hand, when “3 MB” is being carried over (between 3 MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state as the RT state (“1” in bit 4 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27)). Is stored (set)).

  After the process of S86, or when S82 or S85 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S87). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means for executing an internal winning combination determining process (internal winning combination determining means). In S86 during the internal lottery process described above, the RT gaming state corresponding to the type of MB being carried over is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means for performing transition control of the RT gaming state (replay time state control means).

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the MB gaming state (S91).

  In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the MB gaming state (when S91 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S93 described later. On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (when S91 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the small role / replay data pointer as the rotation stop number. (S92).

  After the processing of S92 or when S91 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to a reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and based on the acquired number of times of turning stop, various information corresponding to the turning stop number. Is acquired (S93). In this process, the number of the stop table of the reels used during the first stop to the third stop and information necessary for the control change process (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and stopped at a specific position) Information for selecting the stop table again is acquired.

  In the reel stop initial setting table, the correspondence between the number for stopping the rotation and various information such as a drawing priority table selection data and a drawing priority table number described later is defined. The stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, the number of sliding pieces is used so that the reels stop at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to cause any disadvantage to the player and to prevent erroneous winnings by using the prescribed information. Is stipulated.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) (S94).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores “3” in the stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S95). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 63). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the drawing priority order storing process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S102). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in the process of S102, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S111 described later are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S102 again, next, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S111 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S102 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S103). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. Details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the position data of the search symbol and sets “20” as the number of symbol checks (S104). Then, the main CPU 93 performs symbol code storage processing (S105). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the position data of the current search symbol located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. Details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 25) based on the symbol code acquired in S105 and the data in the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 30) (S106). At this time, regardless of whether the internal winning combination is won or not, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12) may be acquired by collating. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the drawing priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 25) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to a ranking table (not shown), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  The pull-in priority table is a table that defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each pull-in priority table number. The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the priority order is set in the order of replay, small role and bonus from the highest.

  If the symbol position is an erroneous winning prize when stopped, “use prohibited (000H)” is acquired as the drawing priority data in S107. Further, if the symbol position is not internally won but does not result in an erroneous winning even if it is stopped, “can be stopped (001H)” is acquired as the drawing priority data in S107.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired drawing priority data in a drawing priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S108). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area.

  The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each reel type. Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “19” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to this pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table.

  The contents of the priority order pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority order data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority order table number in the pull-in priority order table referenced when determining the pull-in priority order data. The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds “1” to the position data of the search symbol and subtracts “1” from the number of symbol checks (S109). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is “0” (S110).

  In S110, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is not “0” (when S110 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S105 and repeats the processes after S105. On the other hand, in S110, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is “0” (in the case where S110 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S111).

  In S111, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of times of search (when S111 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S102 and repeats the processes after S102. On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the main CPU 93 has searched as many times as the number of searches (when S111 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process and the process in S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 63). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a description will be given of the pull-in priority table selection process performed in S103 in the flow-chart storing process flowchart (see FIG. 69).

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S121).

  In S121, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table selection data is set (in the case where S121 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and the operation stop button storage area. Referring to (see FIG. 28), the drawing priority table number corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data is set from the drawing priority table selection table (not shown) (S122). After the process of S122, the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S104 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 69).

  The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority selection number and the stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in the pull-in priority table (not shown).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority table selection data is not set in S121 (when S121 is NO), the main CPU 93 displays the pull-in priority table corresponding to the pull-in priority table number. Set (S123). After the process of S123, the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S104 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 69).

[Design code storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the symbol code storing process performed in S105 in the flowchart of the drawing priority order storing process (see FIG. 69) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S131). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets check symbol position data for the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S132). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S133). The main CPU 93 then stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, ends the symbol code storage process, and moves the process to S106 in the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 69).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the reel stop control process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S141). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the effective stop button is not pressed (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S141 and the effective stop button pressing operation is executed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S141 that a valid stop button has been pressed (in the case where S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28) is updated (S142). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts “1” from the value of the stop button non-operating counter (S143).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S144). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S145).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S146). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of pieces of sliding piece determination based on the type of stop button at the time of the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a priority pull-in control process (S147). In this process, the drawing priority order data is compared according to each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” or “1” from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel stop command generation / storage processing (S148). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding piece determination data acquired in S146, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 95 (S149). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position determined in S149 as a search symbol position (S150). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 71 (S151). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) using the acquired symbol code (S152).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs control change processing (S153). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S154). In S154, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inoperative counter is not “0” (when S154 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 69 (S155). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S141 and repeats the processes after S141.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S154 that the inoperative counter is “0” (in the case where S154 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 63). (Refer to S13).

  As described above, the reel stop control process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (design variation display).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the priority pull-in control process performed in S147 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S161). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires data of the stop start position (S162).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) is operating (S163). In S163, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating (when S163 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S165 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating in S163 (when S163 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search target reel is the left reel 3L (S164). .

  In S164, when the main CPU 93 determines that the search target reel is not the left reel 3L (when S164 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a process of S165 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S164 that the search target reel is the left reel 3L (when S164 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S167 described later.

  When S163 or S164 is NO (when the maximum number of sliding symbols is 4 and reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets a priority table corresponding to the number of sliding symbols determination data (S165).

  Note that the priority order table includes the sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the stop table and a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding pieces (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is four). )) In order of priority (hereinafter referred to as "priority order"). That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of sliding frames to be preferentially applied is determined for each piece of sliding frame number determination data. In this embodiment, each numerical value is searched (checked) sequentially from the lower priority order “5” of the priority order table, and the number corresponding to the priority order “1” is preferentially applied as the number of sliding frames. So that In the process of S165, for example, when the number of pieces of sliding piece determination data is “4”, the priority order data defined in the address in the priority order table corresponding to the number of pieces of sliding piece determination data “4” is stored. Set.

  After the process of S165, the main CPU 93 sets “5” as the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S166). By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) five times within the range of 0 frame to 4 frames. Then, after the process of S166, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S169 described later.

  When S164 is YES (when the maximum number of sliding symbols is one and reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets the priority table for the MB gaming state corresponding to the number of sliding symbols determination data. (S167). Next, the main CPU 93 sets “3” as the initial value of the priority order and sets “2” as the number of checks (S168). By this processing, the priority order is checked (searched) twice in the range of 0 frame to 1 frame. Then, after the process of S168, the main CPU 93 performs a process of S169 described later.

  After the processing of S166 or S168, the main CPU 93 sets the sliding piece number determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S169).

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S170). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires pull-in priority order data of the stop search position (S171).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the pull-in priority data acquired in S171 is greater than or equal to the value of the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S172). In S172, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S171 is not equal to or higher than the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S172 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S174 described later. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S172 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S171 is greater than or equal to the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S172 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the number of sliding frames. Update (S173).

  After the processing of S173 or when S172 is NO, the main CPU 93 subtracts “1” from the priority order value and the number of checks (S174).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S175). In S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (when S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S170 and repeats the processes after S170.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is “0” in S175 (when S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the finally updated number of sliding symbols (S176). After the process of S176, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control process, and moves the process to S148 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the bonus end check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) is in operation with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) (S181). When the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating in S181 (when S181 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63). Move.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating in S181 (when S181 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs CB termination processing (S182). In this processing, processing such as turning off a game state flag (not shown) corresponding to “CB”, clearing the winning possible number counter and the possible gaming number counter, and the like are performed. Next, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter (S183).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (S184). In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (when S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 63)).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S184 that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (when S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs MB end processing (S185). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and sets the gaming state flag (2 MB gaming state flag or 3 MB gaming state flag) corresponding to the active MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) to the off state. To do. Note that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” means that the number of medals paid out exceeds 2 during the 2 MB gaming state, or the number of medals paid out exceeds 30 during the 3 MB gaming state. Means when

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command generation / storage process (S186). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by a command data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Then, after the process of S186, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and moves the process to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the bonus operation check process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) is operating (S191). In S191, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating (when S191 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S193 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating in S191 (when S191 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs CB operation processing (S192). After the process of S192, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  When S191 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether the MB (“2 MB” or “3 MB”) is a winning prize (S193). In S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not a prize (when S193 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S197 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is a winning in S193 (when S193 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an MB operation process corresponding to the type of the winning MB (S194). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27), and sets the value of the bonus end number counter to a predetermined value (“30” or “2”). Set to. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 also performs the CB operation process of S192.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S195). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S196). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Also, the bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by command data transmission processing in an interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

  After the process of S196, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

  When S193 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a winning combination related to replay (replay) has been won (S197). In S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to replay has not been won (when S197 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (see FIG. 63). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S197 that the winning combination relating to replay has been won (when S197 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic insertion of medals (S198). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S198, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, an interrupt process by the control of the main CPU 93 will be described. In the interrupt process described below, the main control circuit 91 performs a reel control process and also a transmission process of various command data. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs control processing of the symbol variation display operation and also serves as means for transmitting various command data (data transmission means).

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S201). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S203). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. When the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main CPU 93 clears the game lock flag.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. Three stepping motors are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits until the updated symbol counter matches the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the reel display window 4). The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the reel rotation is decelerated and stopped. In the present embodiment, in the process of S204, not only the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process, and stop process, but also a reel effect pattern is set when the reel effect pattern is set during the acceleration process. Reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing are also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs command data transmission processing (S205). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 101. Note that the command data transmission process is executed not at a 1.1172 msec period but at a period of about 16 msec (every 15 interrupt processes).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 24 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register restoration process (S207). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Outline of characteristic processes executed by the sub CPU>
Here, before explaining the detailed operation of the sub-control circuit 101, an outline of various characteristic processes (including penalty process) executed by the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachislot 1 of this embodiment will be described. More specific procedures and the like of various processes described below will be described in detail later with reference to various flowcharts.

[Initialization of game information after power interruption for a predetermined time]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the advantage / disadvantage of the game (acquisition of AT winning chance) is affected by the digestion status (digestion game number) of the normal game. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, when the pachislot machine 1 returns from a power interruption for a predetermined time or more in order to prevent the deferred state of the game information (the number of digested games, etc.) from occurring when the game store is opened, for example. When the power is turned on when the amusement store is opened, for example, the same initialization process as that performed when the setting change command is received is automatically performed.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the setting change command is received when the power interruption elapsed time calculated based on the latest power interruption occurrence time and the power interruption recovery time is 4 hours or more. An initialization process similar to the initialization process sometimes performed is performed to return the game information (the number of digested games, etc.) to the initial state.

  Normally, there is no amusement store that operates a gaming machine for 24 hours (except for exceptional times such as the year-end and New Year holidays), so there is a closed state of 8 hours to 10 hours. In most of the closed period, the gaming machine is turned off. Therefore, if the power interruption elapsed time threshold is set to 4 hours as in the present embodiment, automatic initialization of sub-control is performed at the start of business on the next day, and the digestion status of the number of games is reliably set to “0”. To start the game. However, the power interruption elapsed time threshold is not limited to 4 hours, and can be arbitrarily set as long as the game information can be automatically initialized at the time of opening the store, for example.

  By performing the above-described automatic initialization processing of game information, the game information (the number of digested games, etc.) is automatically reset when returning from a power interruption for a predetermined time, and the occurrence of a deferred state of game information is ensured. Can be prevented. As a result, the occurrence of unfairness in games can be prevented. In addition, this process eliminates the need for an initialization process that is manually performed by the store clerk when the store is opened, thereby reducing the burden on the store clerk.

[Remaining periodic game number subtraction display processing]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, during the normal game, the number of remaining games in the normal game until the start of the transition effect game in the current cycle (hereinafter referred to as “number of remaining cycle games”) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. The The number of remaining periodic games displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is also subtracted and displayed (countdown display) as the normal game is digested. However, if the number of remaining periodic games is subtracted and displayed in a single game when the number of shortened games for which the number of remaining periodic games is won is collectively subtracted and displayed in normal games, The subtraction display time varies greatly depending on the number, and there is a possibility that the game will be delayed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning a cycle shortened lottery in the normal game and subtracting and displaying the number of remaining cycle games for the number of shortened games won, the number of remaining cycle games is determined according to the number of shortened games won. The subtraction display interval (interval for the number of subtraction games) is changed. Specifically, in this embodiment, a value obtained by adding “1” to the quotient obtained by dividing the number of shortened games won by “30” is set as the subtraction display interval of the remaining number of periodic games.

  In this case, when the number of shortened games won is less than 30 games, the subtraction display interval of the remaining period game number is “1”, and the remaining period game number is subtracted and displayed at one game interval. For example, if the number of remaining periodic games is 20 game shortened at the timing of 100 games, the remaining periodic game numbers are “100”, “99”, “98”,..., “81”, “80 Is displayed in a subtracted form.

  On the other hand, when the number of shortened games won is 30 or more, the subtraction display interval of the remaining periodic games is “2” or more, and the remaining periodic games are subtracted and displayed at intervals of 2 or more. For example, when the number of shortened games is “70”, the subtraction display interval of the remaining number of periodic games is “3” (“2” (quotient of 70/30) + “1”). Therefore, for example, when the number of remaining periodic games is 100, the number of remaining periodic games is “100”, “97”, “94”,. , “30” in the form of subtraction. Note that if the subtracted display interval “3” is subtracted from the remaining period game number “31”, the remaining period game number becomes a value (“28”) less than the remaining period game number “30”. In such a case, the remaining number of remaining periodic games “30” is displayed next to the number of remaining periodic games “31”.

  By performing the above-described subtraction display processing of the remaining period game number, the subtraction display time of the remaining period game number can be set to substantially the same time regardless of the number of shortened games won. As a result, even if the normal game is progressed while the remaining period game number is displayed in a subtracted manner, there is no longer a feeling of extension during the normal game, and the game can be advanced without causing the player to wait more than necessary. The method for calculating the subtraction display interval of the remaining period game number is not limited to the above-described example, and the subtraction that can make the subtraction display time of the remaining period game number approximately the same time regardless of the number of shortened games won. Any method for calculating the display interval can be used. For example, a value other than “30” may be used as a value for dividing the number of shortened games won.

[MAX bet button on / off control processing]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the state between 2 MB flags (RT1 gaming state) or the state between 3 MB flags (RT2 gaming state), the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals Is less than 3, even if the player presses the MAX bet button 21, the operation is treated as invalid.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on / off in synchronization with the validity / invalidity determination process of the player's pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21.

  Specifically, in the state between MB flags (non-MB state), the total number of medals stored in the credit (one or more) and the current number of inserted medals (two or less) is less than three. When the player presses down the MAX bet button 21 in a situation (when the press operation of the MAX bet button 21 is invalid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned off. On the other hand, in the state between MB flags (non-MB state), the game is in a situation where the total number of medals stored in the credit (1 or more) and the current number of inserted medals (2 or less) is 3 or more. When the user performs a pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21 (when the pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21 is valid), an LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, similarly in the MB gaming state, the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on / off in synchronization with the validity / invalidity determination processing of the player's pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21. . Specifically, the player presses the MAX bet button 21 when the total number of medals stored in the credit (one or more) and the current number of inserted medals (one or less) is less than two. When the operation is performed (when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes invalid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned off. On the other hand, in a situation where the total number of medals stored in the credit (1 or more) and the current medal insertion number (1 or less) is 2 or more, the player performs an operation of pressing the MAX bet button 21. If it is broken (when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes valid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on.

  In the above-described LED on / off control processing provided on the MAX bet button 21, the LED on / off determination processing is performed using the MAX bet button on / off determination table described with reference to FIGS. .

  When the above-described LED on / off control process for the MAX bet button 21 is employed, when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes invalid, the LED provided for the MAX bet button 21 is also turned off. A player who has no knowledge of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the pressing operation of the bet button 21 is invalid. In this case, even a player who has no knowledge of the game can play the game with peace of mind.

[Generating random number for production]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the production random number value (0-32767) used in various lottery processes performed in the sub-control circuit 101 is generated on software. Here, a method for generating a production random number (lottery random value) will be described.

(1) Various random numbers and various prime numbers used in the production random number value generation process First, in the present embodiment, three lotteries of 16 bits (2 bytes: -32767 to 32767) necessary for producing the production random number value. A random number (a first lottery random number, a second lottery random number, and a third lottery random number) and a 16-bit selection random number are prepared. The first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number are stored in a first lottery random number storage area, a second lottery random number storage area, and a third lottery random number storage area provided in the sub RAM 103, respectively. The selected random number is stored in a selected random number storage area provided in the sub RAM 103.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a 32-bit (4 bytes: 0 to 4294967295) first lottery random number and a second lottery random number for updating the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number, respectively. A prime number and a third random number prime number are prepared. A 32-bit prime for selection random numbers for updating the selection random numbers is also prepared. The first lottery random number prime, the second lottery random number prime number, the third lottery random number prime number, and the selected random number prime number are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86.

  The first lottery random number prime number, the second lottery random number prime number, the third lottery random number prime number, and the selected random number prime number are fixed values, for example, the first lottery random number prime number is “443”, The lottery random number prime may be “71171”, the third lottery random number prime may be “50241141”, and the selected random number prime may be “375511”.

(2) Various random number update processing In the present embodiment, the selected random number, the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number are each approximately 4 msec after the power is turned on. Each random number is updated by performing predetermined arithmetic processing using the first lottery random number prime number, the second lottery random number prime number, and the third lottery random number prime number.

  Specifically, each 16-bit random number is multiplied by the corresponding 32-bit prime, and the result of the multiplication is converted into 16-bit data (only the 16-bit data on the tail side of the multiplication result is left). (Each random value in the range of -32767 to 32767)), the absolute value of the type-converted data is calculated. Thereby, each random number is updated in the range of 0 to 32767. Then, the absolute value calculation result (updated random number) is stored in the corresponding random number storage area, and the update process of each random number is completed. For example, in the first lottery random number update process, first, a 16-bit first lottery random number is multiplied by a 32-bit first lottery random number, and the result of the multiplication is converted into 16-bit data. Then, the absolute value of the type-converted data is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the first lottery random number storage area as the updated first lottery random number. Note that the initial value of each random number is a value at power-on, and a value at reset (“−1”). In addition, when the value of each updated random number of the selected random number, the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number becomes “0”, “1” is added to each random number (non- (Illustrated). In this embodiment, the random number update calculation is performed by the multiplication method as described above. Therefore, when the update calculation result is “0”, all subsequent random number update calculation results are also “0”. This is in order to avoid the malfunction. However, in each random number update process performed in the production random number value generation and acquisition process described later, “0” as the produced production random number value is an effective value, so “1” is assigned to each random number. The process of adding is not performed.

(3) Production random number value generation and acquisition process In this embodiment, the production random number value generation and acquisition process is performed every time the lottery process is executed in the sub-control circuit 101.

  In the production random number value generation and acquisition process, first, the update process (predetermined calculation process) described above is performed on the selected random number to update the selected random number. Next, the updated selected random number is divided by “4”, and the remainder is calculated.

  Next, a predetermined lottery random number is selected from the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number based on the remainder value. In the present embodiment, as shown in a flowchart of random number acquisition processing in FIG. 84 described later, for example, when the remainder is “0” or “1”, the first lottery random number is selected and the remainder is “2”. In this case, the second lottery random number is selected, and when the remainder is “3”, the third lottery random number is selected.

  Next, the above-described update process is performed on the selected predetermined lottery random number to update the predetermined lottery random number. And the predetermined lottery random number (0-32767) after an update is acquired as a random number value for production.

  In the present embodiment, the production random number value is generated and acquired as described above. When the production random number value is generated by the above method, a lot of lottery processes can be handled by one type of random number update process (predetermined calculation process). Further, in the present embodiment, the production random number value is updated and generated using a prime number, so that it is possible to easily cope with the content change specification for each content by adjusting the prime number.

  Note that the method for generating the production random number value is not limited to the above-described example, and can be appropriately changed according to, for example, the production specification, the appearance game specification, or the like. For example, in the above-described lottery random number selection method based on the remainder value, the correspondence between the remainder value and the type of the lottery random number to be selected can be arbitrarily changed according to the appearance specification. Further, the numerical value for dividing the selected random number is not limited to “4”, and can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, although the example which uses 3 types of lottery random numbers was demonstrated in the said example, this invention is not limited to this, You may make it use 2 types or 4 or more types of lottery random numbers. In this case, according to the number of lottery random numbers to be used, the lottery random number selection method based on the selected random number can also be appropriately changed.

[Penalty processing]
The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has a function of giving a penalty when, for example, navigation in the order of pressing a stop button, a predetermined pressing order rule, or the like is ignored, or when an illegal act is detected. Here, various penalty processes performed in the sub control circuit 101 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the penalty flag on / off state, the value of the penalty counter (number of penalties), and the number of penalty games are provided as determination parameters for determining whether or not to perform penalty processing. These determination parameters are stored in the sub RAM 103.

  These determination parameters are basically properly used according to the object to which a penalty is imposed. Specifically, the penalty flag is used when a penalty is imposed in the direct addition lottery performed in the waiting state (determined screen state) of the pseudo BB game. The penalty counter is used when a penalty is imposed on the race win rate data. The number of penalty games is used when a penalty is imposed on the transition process to the pseudo BB game and the cycle shortening lottery process during the normal game.

  In the penalty measure, when multiple types of determination parameters are used as described above, a penalty can be imposed as appropriate according to the gaming property, gaming state, and gaming situation of the gaming machine, so that unauthorized acquisition of a player's profit can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable as much as possible (to avoid excessive penalties).

(1) Penalty processing based on penalty flag In this embodiment, when the penalty flag is on in the waiting state for starting a pseudo BB game (the “BB operation waiting” state described later), the number of AT games is added directly. During the lottery process, a direct top lottery table (see FIGS. 47B and 47C) dedicated to when the penalty flag is ON is referred to.

  At this time, for example, if the current sub game state is a transition effect state ("Race", which will be described later), the internal winning combination is other than the internal winning combination related to "reach eye lip" and "final winning combination" The “no extra” number of AT games is won. Further, for example, when the current sub game state is an AT game ("AT in progress" described later) or a state in which a pseudo BB game is started in an AT game ("AT BB in progress" described later), an internal winning combination Regardless of the type of game, the “no extra” number of AT games is won. That is, when the penalty flag is on, the benefit of adding the number of AT games is almost lost.

  The penalty flag is, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the command sequence (command data reception order) in a predetermined sub-game state (described later “in race”, “general during BB”, or “at AT”), It is turned on when the push button navigation of the stop button at the time of entering the pseudo BB game ("BB entry navigation" described later) and the push order rule are ignored. On the other hand, the penalty flag is reset (turned off) at the end of the AT game or when the pseudo BB game started during the AT game ends.

  Note that the above-described penalty flag on / off control is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (penalty flag setting means) for turning on / off the penalty flag. In addition, the sub-control circuit 101 executes the direct lottery process for adding the number of AT games in the waiting state for the start of the pseudo BB game, which is the target of the penalty process based on the penalty flag. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (notification game number addition determination means) for directly adding the number of AT games and performing lottery processing.

(2) Penalty processing based on the number of penalty games The number of penalty games is the number of games indicating the execution period of penalty processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of penalty games is set to a value of “1” or more, for example, a push order navigation (bell navigation) performed when a predetermined internal winning combination (“push order bell”) is won. Penalty processing such as prohibition, prohibition of cycle shortening lottery processing during normal game, and prohibition of transition processing to BB game (BB entry determination processing described later) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the sub game state is a normal state (described later “general”), a transition effect state (described later “during a race”), or a pseudo BB game start waiting state (described later “BB operation waiting”). , When a small role related to “push order bell” (CT bell) is won internally and the first stop operation is performed on a stop button other than the left stop button 19L (an irregular press), The penalty game number is added to “5” to the set penalty game number. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of penalty games is “10”, and when the number of penalty games exceeds “10” by the penalty game number addition process, the number of penalty games is set to the upper limit value “10”. Is done.

  On the other hand, the sub gaming state is a normal state ("general medium" to be described later) or a waiting state for starting a pseudo BB game ("waiting for BB operation" to be described later). When the internal winning is performed and the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 19L, the number of penalty games is decremented by “1”. In the present embodiment, the number of penalty games is also decremented by “1” when the first stop operation is performed in the AT state (“AT in later”). The number of penalty games is reset at the end of the AT game (final game) or when the pseudo BB game started during the AT state ends (at the end of the “AT BB” game described later) (“ 0 ”is set).

  In the penalty process based on the number of penalty games described above, the general penalty process of prohibiting push order navigation (bell navigation) is performed, so that the player is in a penalty while the game state is being penalized. Penalties can be imposed. Therefore, in this embodiment, by this penalty process, it is possible to instruct the player to play the game according to the game rules while suppressing the player's illegal profit acquisition.

  The penalty processing based on the number of penalty games described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also includes means for adding the number of penalty games (penalty game number addition means) and means for performing a predetermined penalty process based on the number of penalty games (penalty execution means). I also serve.

(3) Penalty processing based on penalty counter The penalty counter is a counter that counts the number of illegal operations (such as ignoring push order rules) performed during a predetermined game period, and each time it is determined that an illegal operation has been performed. In addition, “1” is added to the value of the penalty counter. In this embodiment, when the value of the penalty counter (number of penalties) is “1” or more, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table (see FIG. 40) is referred to, and the value of the penalty counter is set. Accordingly, rewriting lottery of the probability of winning AT (race winning rate) is performed.

  At this time, as the penalty counter value increases, the probability that the race win rate is rewritten to a value lower than the current race win rate increases. In this embodiment, as shown in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table of FIG. 40, the probability of the race win rate being rewritten to 0% increases as the value of the penalty counter increases.

  Also, in this embodiment, when winning the race win rate data rewriting lottery and the race win rate is rewritten to 0% (when the AT lottery right is extinguished), a “race consecutive loss counter” (described later) ( The addition processing of the value of the (ceiling counter) (the number of consecutive non-AT winning cycles) is also prohibited. In other words, when the value of the penalty counter is “1” or more and the race win rate is rewritten to 0%, the number of normal game ceiling cycles (AT non-winning continuous cycles) for which AT winning is determined as a penalty. If the number of times reaches 10, the AT win will be substantially extended.

  In the present embodiment, the sub gaming state is a normal state ("General" described later) or a transition effect state ("During race" described later), and a small role related to "Push order bell" (CT bell) When an internal winning is made and the first stop operation is performed on a stop button other than the left stop button 19L (an irregular pressing is performed), “1” is added to the currently set penalty counter value. The In this embodiment, the upper limit of the penalty counter is “10”, and when the value of the penalty counter exceeds “10” by this addition processing, the value of the penalty counter is set to the upper limit value “10”. .

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the penalty counter is reset (“0” is set) when the sub gaming state shifts to a transition effect state (“Race effect” described later) (when a race effect occurs). ) The value of the penalty counter is also reset at the end of the AT game (final game) or when the pseudo BB game started during the AT state ends (at the end of the “AT BB” game described later). .

  By performing the penalty processing based on the value of the penalty counter described above, the race result (AT lottery result) can be rewritten with a predetermined probability corresponding to the number of illegal operations. Therefore, when the value of the penalty counter is small (when the number of illegal operations is small), the possibility of erroneous operation is high, and therefore the AT occurrence rate may be set to a value close to the probability of a state where no penalty has occurred. it can. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is large (when the number of illegal operations is large), there is a high possibility that the malicious operation is intentionally performed, so the probability that the AT occurrence rate decreases (including 0%) is increased. be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, an appropriate penalty can be imposed on the player in accordance with the degree of unauthorized operation.

  The penalty processing based on the above-described penalty counter value is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for counting the number of illegal operations executed (penalty count counting means) and a means for performing predetermined penalty processing based on the value of the penalty counter (penalty execution means). Also doubles.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 148. Various tables necessary for various processes of the sub CPU 102 described below are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 103.

  In the various processes of the sub CPU 102 described below, the sub game state in the previous unit game (game), the sub game state in the current unit game, and the sub game state in the next unit game are managed. The Hereinafter, the sub game state in the previous unit game is referred to as “gaming state (previous)”, the sub game state in the current unit game is referred to as “gaming state (current)”, and the sub game state in the next unit game is referred to as “game state (current)”. This is called “game state (next time)”.

  Furthermore, hereinafter, the case where the sub gaming state is the normal state is referred to as “general medium”, and the pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the normal state is referred to as “general medium BB”. The case where the sub game state is the transition effect state is referred to as “race in progress”, and the case where the sub game state is the AT preparation state is referred to as “AT preparation”. A case where the sub gaming state is the AT state is referred to as “AT in progress”, and a pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the AT state is referred to as “AT in progress BB”. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a case where the sub gaming state is the W chance state is referred to as “W chance state”, and a case where the sub gaming state is the additional challenge state is referred to as “addition challenge”.

[Sub CPU power-on processing]
First, the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the activation request process in the power-on process shown in FIG. 77 is a process of making an activation request for various tasks necessary for the function of the pachislot 1 to the OS.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization process (S211). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 executes processing such as initialization of the CPU and internal devices and initialization of peripheral ICs.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires information on the power interruption occurrence time stored in the power interruption occurrence time storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 (S212). Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires current time information from the RTC 108 (S213). Next, the sub CPU 102 calculates an elapsed time by subtracting the power interruption occurrence time (most recent power interruption occurrence time) acquired in S212 from the current time acquired in S213 (S214).

  Next, based on the elapsed time calculated in S214, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not 4 hours or more have elapsed since the most recent power interruption (S215). In S215, when the sub CPU 102 determines that four hours or more have not elapsed since the most recent power interruption (when S215 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S217 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S215 that four hours or more have elapsed since the most recent power interruption (S215 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs initialization command reception processing (S216). In this process, for example, various game information (for example, the number of digested games) is reset. That is, in the present embodiment, for example, initialization processing of various data controlled by the sub CPU 102 is automatically performed by power-on processing at the start of business at a game store. Details of the initialization command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later.

  After the process of S216 or when S215 is NO, the sub CPU 102 makes a start request for a lamp control task (see FIG. 79 described later) as a subtask start request (S217). Next, the sub CPU 102 makes a startup request for a sound control task (see FIG. 80 described later) (S218). Then, the sub CPU 102 makes an activation request for the mother task (see FIG. 81 described later) (S219).

  As described above, in the power-on process according to the present embodiment, when the elapsed time from the occurrence of the power interruption is 4 hours (predetermined time) or more, the initialization command reception process is performed. This is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means for initializing various game information (power-on initialization means) when the elapsed time from the occurrence of power interruption is a predetermined time or more.

[Power failure detection processing]
Next, the power interruption detection process of the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. This process is, for example, an interrupt process that is executed when a power interruption state that occurs when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned off or the like is detected.

  When the occurrence of a power interruption is detected, the sub CPU 102 acquires current time information from the RTC 108 and stores the current time information as power interruption occurrence time information in a power interruption occurrence time storage area provided in the sub RAM 103. (S221).

[Ramp control task]
Next, a lamp control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described power-on process of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 77), when a lamp control task start command is issued from the OS in response to a lamp control task start request from the sub CPU 102, lamp control is performed according to the procedure described below. The task is executed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interrupt initialization process (S231). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs initialization processing of data related to lamp control (S232).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interruption waiting process (S233). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound control task (see FIG. 80 described later) execution process (S234).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lamp data analysis processing (S235). In this process, for example, the sub CPU 102 analyzes (determines) whether there is an LED control request for various LEDs (LED group 85, LEDs for turning on the MAX bet button, etc.) provided on the front door 2b. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp effect execution process (S236). If it is determined in the analysis process of S235 that there is an LED control request, the sub CPU 102 creates predetermined LED control data in response to the LED control request in the process of S236, and responds to the created LED control data. To the LED board. On the other hand, if it is determined by the analysis processing in S235 that there is no LED control request, the sub CPU 102 creates LED update data as LED control data in the processing in S236, and uses the LED control data as a corresponding LED board. Send to etc.

  Then, after the process of S236, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S233 and repeats the processes after S233.

Sound control task
Next, a sound control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described power-on process of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 77), when a sound control task activation command is generated from the OS in response to a sound control task activation request from the sub CPU 102, sound control is performed according to the procedure described below. The task is executed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs initialization processing of data related to sound control (S241). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp control task (see FIG. 79) execution process (S242).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data analysis processing (S243). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound effect execution process (S244). Then, after the processing of S244, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S242 and repeats the processing after S242.

[Mother Task]
Next, a mother task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described power-on process of the sub CPU 102 (see FIG. 77), when a mother task activation command is generated from the OS in response to a mother task activation request from the sub CPU 102, the mother task is executed according to the procedure described below. Is done.

  First, the sub CPU 102 makes an activation request for a main task (see FIG. 82 described later) (S251). Next, the sub CPU 102 makes an activation request for the main board communication task (see FIG. 85 described later) (S252). Then, the sub CPU 102 makes an activation request for an animation task (see FIG. 86 described later) (S253).

[Main Task]
Next, the main task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the mother task (see FIG. 81) of the sub CPU 102 described above, when the main task start command is generated from the OS in response to the main task start request from the sub CPU 102, the main task is executed according to the procedure described below. The In the present embodiment, the main task is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronizing Signal) interrupt initialization process (S261). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC interrupt waiting process (S262). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a drawing process (S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a random number update process (S264). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs an update process of the selected random number and various lottery random numbers (first lottery random number to third lottery random number) for generating a production random number value. Details of the random number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later. Then, after the process of S264, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S262 and repeats the processes after S262.

[Random number update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the random number update processing performed in S264 in the main task flowchart (see FIG. 82) will be described. In the present embodiment, the random number update process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the random number update processing, the sub CPU 102 performs update processing of various random numbers stored in various random number storage areas provided in the sub RAM 103 (S271). In this process, the sub CPU 102 selects a 32-bit selected random number prime, a first random number random number corresponding to a 16-bit selected random number, a first lottery random number, a second lottery random number, and a third lottery random number, Using the second lottery random number prime number and the third lottery random number prime number, the predetermined arithmetic processing described above is performed to update each random number.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102 multiplies each 16-bit random number by a corresponding 32-bit prime number, and converts the result of the multiplication into 16-bit data (data for 16 bits on the tail side of the multiplication result). Only (respective random values in the range of -32767 to 32767), and the absolute value of the type-converted data is calculated. Thereby, each random number is updated in the range of 0-32767. In addition, when the value of each updated random number of the selected random number, the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number becomes “0”, “1” is added to each random number (non- (Illustrated). However, in each random number update process performed in the production random number value generation and acquisition process described later, “0” as the produced production random number value is an effective value, so “1” is assigned to each random number. The process of adding is not performed.

  Then, after the process of S271, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number update process and moves the process to S262 of the main task (see FIG. 82).

  As described above, the random number update process of this embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for updating various random numbers at a predetermined cycle (random number update means).

[Random number acquisition processing]
Next, the random number acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, every time lottery processing (for example, race information lottery processing, pseudo BB lottery processing, direct addition lottery processing, cycle shortening lottery processing, push order navigation lottery processing, etc., which will be described later) is executed by the sub CPU 102. In addition, a random number acquisition processing program described below is called and executed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 updates the 16-bit selected random number stored in the selected random number storage area by using the 32-bit selected random number prime, and generates the rendered random number value for the updated selected random number. Obtained as a selected random number (S281). Note that the update process of the selected random number in S281 is performed in the same manner as the update process of each random number described in the random number update process of FIG. 83, but the correction process when the value of the selected random number becomes “0” (“ 1 ”is not added).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 divides the selected random number acquired in S281 by “4” and calculates the remainder (S282). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the remainder value is “0” or “1” (S283).

  In S283, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the remainder value is “0” or “1” (when S283 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the 16-bit random number storage area stored in the first lottery random number storage area. The first lottery random number is updated using a 32-bit first lottery random number prime number, and the updated first lottery random number is acquired as an effect random number value (0-32767) used in the callee lottery process ( S284). The update process of the first lottery random number in S284 is performed in the same manner as the update process of each random number described in the random number update process of FIG. 83, except that the value of the first lottery random number becomes “0”. Correction processing (processing of adding “1”) is not performed. Then, after the process of S284, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquisition process and returns the effect random number acquired in S284 to the callee lottery process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S283 that the remainder value is not “0” or “1” (when S283 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the remainder value is “2”. Is discriminated (S285).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the remainder value is “2” in S285 (when S285 is YES), the sub CPU 102 stores the 16-bit second lottery random number stored in the second lottery random number storage area. Is updated using a 32-bit second lottery random number prime number, and the updated second lottery random number is acquired as an effect random number value (0-32767) used in the callee lottery process (S286). The update process of the second lottery random number in S286 is performed in the same manner as the update process of each random number described in the random number update process of FIG. 83, except that the value of the second lottery random number becomes “0”. Correction processing (processing of adding “1”) is not performed. Then, after the process of S286, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquisition process and returns the effect random number acquired in S286 to the callee lottery process.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S285 that the remainder value is not “2” (the remainder value is “3”) (when S285 is NO), the sub CPU 102 stores the third lottery random number. The 16-bit third lottery random number stored in the area is updated using a 32-bit third lottery random number prime number, and the updated third lottery random number is used for the rendering random number value ( 0 to 32767) (S287). Note that the third lottery random number update process of S287 is performed in the same manner as the random number update process described in the random number update process of FIG. 83, except that the value of the third lottery random number becomes “0”. Correction processing (processing of adding “1”) is not performed. Then, after the process of S287, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquisition process and returns the effect random number acquired in S287 to the callee lottery process.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the selection random number and various lottery random numbers for generating the production random number value are not only updated in the random number update process performed at a cycle of about 4 msec but also updated in the random number acquisition process. Is done.

  As described above, the random number acquisition process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for generating a production random number value (lottery random number generation means). In the random number acquisition process described above, the selected random number is updated using the selected random number prime, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for updating the selected random number (selected random number updating means) when generating the production random number value. In the random number acquisition process described above, a predetermined lottery random number is selected based on the updated selected random number, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for selecting a predetermined lottery random number based on the updated selected random number (lottery random number selection means). Furthermore, in the random number acquisition process described above, the random number for presentation is acquired by updating the selected lottery random number, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means for obtaining the production random number value by updating the selected lottery random number (lottery random value obtaining means).

[Main board communication task]
Next, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the mother task (see FIG. 81) of the sub CPU 102 described above, when a main board communication task start command is issued from the OS in response to the main board communication task start request from the sub CPU 102, the main task is executed in accordance with the procedure described below. A board communication task is executed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs communication message queue initialization processing (S291). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs reception command check processing (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of received command and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a valid command has been received (S293). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with one of 16 types of codes “01H” to “10H”, and when the game is operating normally, the command type is “01H” to It will be either “10H”. Therefore, in the process of S293, if the code of the received command type is any one of “01H” to “10H”, the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is valid (specified type). On the other hand, if the code of the command type is other than “01H” to “10H”, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including an illegal act) has occurred during the game, and the command type is invalid. judge.

  In S293, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a valid command has not been received (when S293 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S292 and repeats the processes after S292. On the other hand, when it is determined in S293 that the sub CPU 102 has received a valid command (when S293 is YES), the sub CPU 102 generates various game information based on the received command, and the generated various game information. Is stored in the sub-RAM 103 (S294).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs command analysis processing (S295). Details of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a command sequence check process (S296). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the reception order (sequence) of received commands, and when there is an abnormality in the sequence, performs a predetermined penalty process. Details of the command sequence check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. After the process of S296, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S292 and repeats the processes after S292.

[Anime task]
Next, an animation task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. In the mother task (see FIG. 81) of the sub CPU 102 described above, when an animation task activation command is generated from the OS in response to the animation task activation request from the sub CPU 102, the animation task is executed according to the procedure described below. The In the present embodiment, the animation task is executed at a period of about 33 msec.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks the change of the current game information generated by the main board communication task from the previous game information (S301). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs object control processing (S302).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs animation task management processing (S303). The details of the animation task management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. Then, after the processing of S303, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S301 and repeats the processing after S301.

  As described above, each process of the animation task according to the present embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for controlling the image display operation (image display control means) based on the determined effect.

[Anime task management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the animation task management process performed in S303 in the animation task flowchart (see FIG. 86) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs an effect sequence update process (S311). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly updates the production timeline (reproduced image frame index).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs time frame update processing (S312). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a predetermined event (for example, a start event, a rotation start event, a reel stop event, a display event, or the like) has occurred, and when the event occurs, the start position of the effect sequence is set as the generated event. Change to the corresponding position and clear the production timeline. Also, in this process, if there is call sign data associated (linked) with the image frame (time frame) of the effect sequence data in the current effect time line, the call sign data is provided in the sub RAM 83. Stored in the call sign storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires call sign data associated with the time frame (S313). If call sign data associated with the time frame is not stored in the call sign storage area, call sign data is not acquired in this process.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the call sign data acquired in S313 includes a sushi material symbol rewrite instruction request (S314).

  In S314, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the call sign data does not include a renewal instruction request for the sushi material symbol (when S314 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S316 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S314 that the call sign data includes a request for rewriting the sushi material symbol (in the case where S314 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the sushi based on the acquired call sign data. The rewrite display data of the net symbol is acquired and rewrite drawing processing is registered (S315).

  In addition, at the time of the process of S315, when the data conversion occurrence lottery of the sushi material is won (S802 at the time of Kappa victory_game start processing in FIG. 127 described later), the rewriting display of the sushi material symbol is confirmed In step S315, based on the sushi material symbol rewriting display data, a plurality of sushi material symbols (for five games) on and after the next game displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are simultaneously rewritten. On the other hand, if the sushi material data conversion occurrence lottery has not been won at the time of the processing of S315, the sushi material symbol rewriting display data is not acquired in the processing of S315, and the sushi material symbol is not rewritten.

  After the process of S315 or when S314 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the period information (number of remaining period games) of the normal game is being displayed (S316).

  In S316, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the normal game cycle information is not being displayed (when S316 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management process, and the process is an animation task (see FIG. 86). To S301.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S316 that the period information of the normal game is being displayed (when S316 is YES), the sub CPU 102 starts from the display of the previous period information (number of remaining period games). It is determined whether or not an image reproduction time equal to or longer than a frame has elapsed (S317). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the previous display of the cycle information has reached the cycle information update display interval.

  Note that if the update display interval of the cycle information is set to one frame interval, a change in the cycle information (the number of remaining cycle games) becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize. Therefore, in this embodiment, the update display interval of the cycle information is 5 frames or more. And However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update display interval of the cycle information can be arbitrarily set as long as the change of the cycle information is visible to the player.

  In S317, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the image playback time of 5 frames or more has not elapsed since the previous display of the cycle information (when S317 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management process. Then, the process proceeds to S301 of the animation task (see FIG. 86). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S317 that the image reproduction time of five frames or more has elapsed since the previous display of the cycle information (when S317 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs cycle information display processing ( S318). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates the normal game cycle information (the number of remaining games in the current cycle) and also determines the display form (subtracted display form of the remaining number of games). Details of the cycle information display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

  After the process of S318, the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management process, and moves the process to S301 of the animation task (see FIG. 86).

  As described above, in S313 of the animation task management process of the present embodiment, a sushi material symbol rewriting instruction request associated with a predetermined image frame in the effect video displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 is included. Call sign data is acquired, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means (change command information acquisition means) for acquiring call sign data including a request for rewriting sushi material symbols in the animation task management process. In S315 of the animation task management process described above, when the renewal display of the sushi material symbol is confirmed and the call sign data including the request for rewriting the sushi material symbol is acquired, the sushi material symbol is displayed. Is displayed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (addition game information change display means) for performing rewriting display (change display) of the sushi material symbol based on the call sign data.

[Cycle information display processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the period information display process performed in S318 in the flowchart of the animation task management process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the cycle counter (S321). Note that the value of the period counter indicates the number of games of the normal game actually remaining in the current period (the true value of the number of remaining period games), and the value of the previous period counter is the period counter at the time of the previous period information display process. Is the value of And, for example, when the game moves to the next game between the previous cycle information display process and the current cycle information display process, or when the value of the cycle counter is subtracted by winning the cycle shortening lottery The value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the cycle counter, and S321 is YES.

  In S321, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is not different from the value of the cycle counter (when S321 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the cycle information display process and the animation task management process. (See FIG. 87) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S321 that the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the cycle counter (when S321 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is the same as the value of the display cycle counter. It is determined whether or not they are the same (S322). The value of the display cycle counter is the value of the remaining cycle game number displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  For example, if the current cycle information display process is performed immediately after the game has shifted to the next game, or is performed immediately after the cycle counter value is subtracted after winning the cycle shortening lottery, Since the value of the cycle counter is the same as the value of the display cycle counter, S322 is YES. Further, for example, after winning the cycle shortening lottery, the cycle information is displayed during the operation of subtracting (counting down) the remaining cycle game number displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 at a predetermined subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval). When the display process is performed, the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the display cycle counter, so S322 is NO.

  In S322, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the display cycle counter (when S322 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S324 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S322 that the value of the previous cycle counter is the same as the value of the display cycle counter (when S322 is YES), the sub CPU 102 displays the remaining information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. A subtraction display interval (predetermined unit game number interval) for subtracting and displaying the number of periodic games is determined (S323).

  In the determination processing of the subtraction display interval in S323, for example, a value obtained by subtracting the value of the cycle counter from the value of the previous cycle counter (corresponding to the number of shortened games when winning the cycle shortening lottery) is divided by “30”. A value obtained by adding “1” to the quotient obtained by the division is set as a subtraction display interval. For example, when the number of shortened games of 100 games is won in the cycle shortened lottery, the subtraction display interval is “4” (100/30 quotient + 1). For example, when the number of shortened games won by the cycle shortening lottery is 20, the subtraction display interval is “1” (20/30 quotient + 1).

  After the processing of S323 or when S322 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets a value obtained by subtracting the subtraction display interval from the value of the display cycle counter to the value of the display cycle counter (S324). By this process, the value of the display period counter is updated, and the remaining period game number of the normal game displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 is also subtracted. In addition, in the update process of the display cycle counter of S324 performed when S322 is NO, the subtraction display interval at the time of the previous cycle information display process is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is greater than or equal to the value of the display cycle counter (S325). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the remaining number of remaining periodic games scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 is less than the true value of the remaining number of remaining periodic games of the normal game that is currently remaining. Is determined.

  In S325, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or greater than the value of the display cycle counter (when S325 is NO), that is, the remaining cycle game number of the normal game scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is If the value of the remaining number of remaining periodic games is not currently less than the true value, the sub CPU 102 ends the cycle information display process and also ends the animation task management process (see FIG. 87). To do.

  On the other hand, in S325, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is equal to or larger than the value of the display cycle counter (when S325 is YES), that is, the remaining cycle of the normal game scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 If the number of games has become less than the true value of the remaining number of remaining periodic games, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the period counter in the previous period counter (S326).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter in the display cycle counter (S327). By this processing, the true value of the remaining number of remaining periodic games of the normal game that is actually left is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. That is, when the number of remaining periodic games of the normal game scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 becomes less than the true value of the remaining number of periodic games, the true value of the remaining periodic game number of the normal game is the liquid crystal display device 11 Displayed on the LCD screen. Then, after the process of S327, the sub CPU 102 ends the cycle information display process and also ends the animation task management process (see FIG. 87).

  As described above, in the cycle information display process of the present embodiment, when winning a cycle shortened lottery during a normal game, the remaining cycle game number is subtracted and displayed at a predetermined subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval). This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in this embodiment, when the sub-control circuit 101 wins a cycle shortening lottery during a normal game, the sub-control circuit 101 subtracts and displays the remaining cycle game number (remaining unit game number) of the normal game at a predetermined unit game number interval. Also serves as means (subtraction display control means). In the cycle information display process described above, the subtraction game number interval for subtracting and displaying the remaining period game number is determined based on the number of shortened games won, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for determining the subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval determination means) based on the number of shortened games won.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the command analysis processing performed in S295 in the main board communication task flowchart (see FIG. 85) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs effect content determination processing (S331). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the production content according to the received data. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an effect determined in the effect content determination process of S331 (S332).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S332 that there is no determined effect (when S332 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command analysis process, and the process is S296 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S332 that there is a determined effect (when S332 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires effect sequence data (effect video data) based on the determined effect. (S333).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lamp data determination processing (S334). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined lamp data according to the contents of the effect determined in S331. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sound data determination processing (S335). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined sound data according to the content of the effect determined in S331.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the determined various data (S336). Then, after the process of S336, the sub CPU 102 ends the command analysis process and moves the process to S296 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

[Command sequence check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the command sequence check process performed in S296 in the main board communication task flowchart (see FIG. 85) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the received command is a determination target command of a command sequence (command reception order) (S341).

  When a player plays a game with normal operation, the order of “BET”, “Start”, “Reel rotation start”, “Stop”, “Display of symbol combination”, “Medal payout” (hereinafter, “medal payout”) The operation is performed in the basic order), and the command of the type corresponding to each operation is transmitted to the sub CPU 102 in this basic order. Therefore, the determination target commands in the process of S341 are a medal insertion command (BET command), a start command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning operation command (display command), and a payout end command. The present invention is not limited to this, and a bonus start command, a bonus end command, or the like may be included in the command sequence determination target command.

  In S341, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is not a command sequence determination target command (in the case of NO determination in S341), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process and performs the process on the main board communication task ( The process proceeds to S292 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S341 that the received command is a command sequence determination target command (when S341 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a command sequence determination process (S342). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reception order of the determination target command is a predetermined order (order during normal operation).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is an abnormality in the command sequence based on the result of the determination process in S342 (S343). In S343, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no abnormality in the command sequence (in the case where S343 is NO), that is, when a game is being played in normal operation, the sub CPU 102 performs command sequence check processing. The process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S292 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S343 that there is an abnormality in the command sequence (when S343 is YES), that is, when it is determined that some abnormality (including fraud) has occurred during the game. The sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “in general”, “during race”, “in general BB”, or “in-AT BB” (S344).

  In S344, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S344 is not satisfied (when S344 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process and performs the process of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to S292. On the other hand, when it is determined in S344 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S344 (when S344 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “5” to the current number of penalty games (S345). If the number of penalty games after the addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit value of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the number of penalty games.

  After the processing of S345, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “Race”, “General BB”, or “AT BB” (S346).

  In S346, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S346 is not satisfied (in the case where S346 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process and performs the process of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to S292. On the other hand, when it is determined in S346 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S346 (when S346 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “BB entry check flag” is on (S347). ). The BB entry check flag is a flag provided for checking the occurrence of an event called “command spill” due to a goto action (unauthorized action). When a command spill occurs, the BB entry check flag is turned off, thereby generating a state in which the pseudo BB game is not started.

  In S347, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not in the on state (when S347 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process, and performs the process on the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). ) To S292. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S347 that the BB entry check flag is on (when S347 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the penalty flag on (S348). Then, after the process of S348, the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process, and moves the process to S292 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, the effect content determination process performed in S331 in the command analysis process flowchart (see FIG. 89) will be described. The effect data determined (registered) in the following process is data specifying animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when effect data is registered in the following processes, corresponding animation data, sound data, lamp data, and the like are determined, and effects such as video display, sound reproduction, and lamp turn-off are executed.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the initialization command is received (S351).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S351 that the initialization command is being received (S351 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs initialization command reception processing (S352). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the initialization process, based on information such as the presence / absence of a change in the set value and the set value included in the initialization command. In the initialization command reception process, various game information (such as the number of digested games) is also reset. The details of the initialization command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. After the process of S352, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S351 that the initialization command is not received (S351 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal insertion command is received (S353).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S353 that the medal insertion command is being received (when S353 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a medal insertion command reception process (S354). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines effect data at the time of medal insertion (betting) based on information such as presence / absence of medal insertion, value of the number-of-insertions counter, value of credit counter, etc. included in the medal insertion command. (sign up. Details of the process when receiving the medal insertion command will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S354, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S353 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a medal insertion command (NO in S353), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is receiving a start command (S355).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S355 that the start command is being received (S355 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a start command receiving process (S356). In this process, the sub CPU 102 includes information such as, for example, a game state flag type, a bonus end number counter value, an internal winning combination type, a flag type related to a lock effect, an effect timer value, and the like included in the start command. Based on this, the production data at the start of the game (at the start) is determined (registered). Details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later. After the process of S356, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S355 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a start command (when S355 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is receiving a reel rotation start command (S357).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S357 that the reel rotation start command is being received (when S357 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a reel rotation start command reception process (S358). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) effect data at the start of reel rotation based on the reel rotation start command. After the process of S358, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S357 that the reel rotation start command is not received (when S357 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command is received (S359).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S359 that the reel stop command is being received (S359 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a reel stop command receiving process (S360). In this process, the sub CPU 102, based on information such as the type of the stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces, the effect number, etc. included in the reel stop command, produces the effect data at the time of reel stop. Determine (register). Details of the reel stop command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136 described later. After the process of S360, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S359 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a reel stop command (NO in S359), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a winning operation command is being received (S361).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S361 that a winning operation command is being received (S361 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a winning operation command receiving process (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) effect data at the time of winning operation based on information included in the winning operation command, such as the type of display combination, a flag related to a lock effect, the number of medals paid out, and the like. . Details of the process upon receiving a winning action command will be described later with reference to FIG. 139 described later. After the process of S362, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S361 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a winning action command (NO in S361), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a payout end command reception (S363).

  In S363, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is time to receive a payout end command (when S363 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs payout end command reception processing (S364). In this process, the sub CPU 102 requests the lighting of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 in accordance with the current credit number of medals. The details of the payout end command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S364, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S363 that it is not at the time of receiving the payout end command (when S363 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is at the time of receiving the bonus start command (S365).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S365 that the bonus start command is being received (S365 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus start command receiving process (S366). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) effect data at the start of the bonus based on the bonus start command. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of credits of the current medal is two or more (S367).

  In S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of credits of the medal is not two or more (when S367 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and the process is a command analysis process (FIG. 89). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S367 that the number of credits of the current medal is two or more (when S367 is YES), the sub CPU 102 requests to turn on the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21. (S368). After the process of S368, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  Here, returning to the process of S365 again, when it is determined in S365 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a bonus start command (when S365 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 receiving a bonus end command? It is determined whether or not (S369).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S369 that the bonus end command is being received (S369 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus end command receiving process (S370). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) effect data at the end of the bonus based on the bonus end command. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current medal credit number is 3 or more (S371).

  In S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of credits of the medal is not 3 or more (in the case of NO determination in S371), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and the process is a command analysis process (FIG. 89). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S371 that the number of credits of the current medal is 3 or more (in the case where S371 is YES), the sub CPU 102 requests to turn on the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21. (S372). After the process of S372, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

  Here, returning to the process of S369 again, when it is determined in S369 that the sub CPU 102 is not receiving a bonus end command (when S369 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 receiving a no-operation command? It is determined whether or not (S373).

  In S373, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a no-operation command reception (when S373 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and the process is S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89). Move to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S373 that the sub CPU 102 is receiving a no-operation command (YES in S373), the sub CPU 102 performs a process when no operation command is received (S374).

  The no-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 71 to the sub-control circuit 72 at a period of about 16 msec when there is no other command transmitted from the main control circuit 71. In the no-operation command reception process, the sub CPU 102 sub-inputs input port state information (for example, on / off information of the BET switch 77, the start switch 78, etc.) included in the no-operation command. The data is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 103. In this process, various processes related to the determination of the number of AT start games are also performed based on the information on the input port state of each operation unit. The details of the non-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 146 described later. Then, after the process of S374, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S332 of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89).

[Process when receiving initialization command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the initialization command reception process performed in S352 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 initializes the appearance-related variables (S381). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets “general” in the gaming state (previous), gaming state (current), and gaming state (next time). In this process, the sub CPU 102 also resets various game information (the number of digested games, etc.), for example, sets “180” to the value of the cycle counter (resets the remaining cycle game number of the normal game).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a race information lottery process (S382). Details of the race information lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. After the process of S382, the sub CPU 102 ends the initialization command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  Note that, as described above, in the initialization command reception process of this embodiment, various game information (the number of digested games, etc.) is reset, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (game information initialization means) for initializing various game information upon reception of the initialization command.

[Race information lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the race information lottery process performed in S382 in the flowchart of the initialization command reception process (see FIG. 93) will be described. In this race information lottery process, various types of information related to the character's race effect performed in the transition effect game are determined by lottery.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a race starter MAP lottery process with reference to the race starter MAP lottery table (see FIG. 32) (S391). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result value (MAP number) of the race starter MAP lottery process to “race starter MAP” (S392).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 33), and based on the value of the “race starter MAP” (race information MAP number), the winning person lottery table corresponding to the race information MAP data. The type (target tables A to J) (see FIG. 34) is determined (S393). In this process, based on the set race starter MAP (race information MAP), the “target table” (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data for the first four races (first to fifth races) Any one of A to J) is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the “target table” for the determined first to fifth races (S394). Then, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process for the race winners (candidates) for the first to fifth races based on the “target table” for the first to fifth races set in S394 ( S395).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the victory subject lottery process to “race winner” (S396). Through this process, the race winners from race 1 to race 5 (“Men A”, “Men B”, “Woman A”, “Tengu”, “Kappa” and “Men A / M B”) Is set to “Race Winner”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 35) and performs a race win rate MAP lottery process (S397). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the race win rate MAP that defines the race win rate data of the “race winner” (race winner) set in S396 based on the current set value (any one of 1 to 6). To decide. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race winning rate MAP) of the race winning rate MAP lottery process in the “race winning rate map” (S398).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 36), and acquires race win rate data corresponding to the set “race win rate map” (S399). In this process, as shown in FIG. 36, only the race win rate data for the current race (the first race) may be determined, or the race win rate data for the second and subsequent races may also be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race winning percentage data acquired in S399 (S400).

  Then, after the processing of S400, the sub CPU 102 ends the race information lottery processing and also ends the initialization command reception processing (see FIG. 93). As described above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the race victory target of the race effect executed in the transition effect game when the initialization command is received (when information regarding the content of the race effect is not set in the initial state). The (candidate) person and their winning percentage are determined.

  As described above, in the race information lottery process of the present embodiment, information on the content of the race effect is determined from the first race to the fifth race (four sets ahead of the current set) at the start of the game period of the normal game. This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 determines information related to the content of each transition effect game performed after the end of the normal game from the current set to the fourth set at the start of the normal game period ( It also serves as a transition effect determining means).

[Process when receiving medal insertion command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the medal insertion command reception process performed in S354 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 acquires information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits based on the reception parameters included in the received medal insertion command (S401). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (the gaming state managed by the main CPU 93) is a non-MB state (S402).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the non-MB state in S402 (when S402 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the non-MB MAX bet button on / off determination table (see FIG. 61). Based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits, it is determined whether the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on or off (S403). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S402 that the gaming state is not the non-MB state (when S402 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the MAX bet button on / off determination table during MB (see FIG. 62). Based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits, it is determined whether the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on or off (S404).

  After the process of S403 or the process of S404, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the determination result of S403 or S404 is lighting of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S405).

  In S405, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination result is lighting of the LED (when S405 is YES), the sub CPU 102 makes a lighting request to the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S406). Then, after the process of S406, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal insertion command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S405 that the determination result is that the LED is not lit (when S405 is NO), the sub CPU 102 issues a request to turn off the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S407). . After the process of S407, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal insertion command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  The LED of the MAX bet button 21 is turned on in synchronization with the determination of validity / invalidity of the pressing operation of the player with respect to the MAX bet button 21 by the process of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 in the above-described medal insertion command reception process. / Can be turned off.

  As described above, in the medal insertion command reception process according to the present embodiment, the LED on / off control of the MAX bet button 21 is controlled based on information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number). This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (light emission control means) for controlling the turning on / off of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 based on information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits. .

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the process at the time of start command reception performed in S356 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a variable setting process (S411). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 performs setting processing of various variables (various flags, counters, etc.) used for effect control according to the type of the sub gaming state. Details of the variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an appearance state update process (S412). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates information on the gaming state (previous), gaming state (current), and gaming state (next time). Note that the details of the appearance state update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a Bns (bonus) state update process (S413). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 performs setting processing of various variables (various flags, counters, etc.) used for effect control according to the type of the pseudo BB state. Details of the Bns state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

  The types of pseudo BB states managed in this embodiment are “BB winning”, “between BB flags”, “waiting for BB operation”, “in BB”, “in JAC”, “in ChaBB”, and “in ChaJAC”. 7 types. “Between BB flags” indicates a state in which a pseudo BB game is being carried over, and “JAC in progress” indicates a state of “JACGAME guaranteed section”. Further, “in ChaBB” indicates the state of “JACIN challenge section” in “general medium BB”, and “in ChaJAC” indicates the state of “JACIN challenge section” in “BB in AT”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is a game start time of “general medium” (hereinafter referred to as “general medium_game start time”) (S414).

  In S414, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “general medium_game start time” (when S414 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium_game start process (S415). . The details of the general medium_game start process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 described later. Then, after the process of S415, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S414, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not “general medium_starting game” (when S414 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the game with the sub gaming state “general medium BB” is performed. It is determined whether or not it is the start time (hereinafter referred to as “general BB_game start time”) (S416).

  In S416, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “general medium BB_game start time” (when S416 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium BB_game start process (S417). . Details of the general BB_game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later. Then, after the processing of S417, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S416 that the sub game state is not “general medium BB_game start time” (when S416 is NO), the sub CPU 102 starts the game in which the sub game state is “race”. It is determined whether or not it is time (hereinafter referred to as “during race_game start”) (S418).

  In S418, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “during racing_when game is started” (when S418 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing during racing_when game starts (S419). . The details of the process during the race_game start will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later. Then, after the process of S419, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S418, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not “in racing” (when S418 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “AT ready”. It is determined whether or not it is a start time (hereinafter referred to as “at AT preparation_game start time”) (S420).

  In S420, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “AT ready_game start” (when S420 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparation_game start processing ( S421). Details of the AT preparation_game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later. Then, after the processing of S421, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S420, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “AT ready_at start of game” (when S420 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub game state is “AT”. It is determined whether or not it is a start time (hereinafter referred to as “at AT start time”) (S422).

  In S422, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “AT during game start” (when S422 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process during AT AT game start (S423). . Details of the AT_game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128 described later. Then, after the processing of S423, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S422, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not “AT-in-game start” (when S422 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub-gaming state is “AT BB”. It is determined whether or not it is a start time (hereinafter referred to as “at BB_game start time during AT”) (S424).

  In S424, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is “at BB_game start during AT” (when S424 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB_game start processing during AT (S425). . The details of the AT BB_game start time process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S425, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S426 described later.

  On the other hand, in S424, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not “at the time of BB_game start during AT” (when S424 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S426 described later.

  After the processing of S415, S417, S419, S421, S423, or S425, or when S424 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs BB precursor counter management processing (S426). In this process, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB precursor counter indicating the number of remaining precursor games until the pseudo BB game is activated.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a game state setting process (S427). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets a gaming state (next time). The details of the game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S427, the sub CPU 102 ends the start command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  Although not shown in FIG. 96, in the series of repeated processing of the above-described sub gaming state determination processing and gaming start processing during the start command reception processing, the sub gaming state is actually “W chance”. And a game start process of “during W chance”, a process of determining whether the sub game state is “addition challenge”, and a game start process of “addition challenge” Is called.

[Variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the variable setting process performed in S411 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (next time) is “general medium” (S431).

  In S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “general” (when S431 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general_variable setting processing (S432). Details of the general medium_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Then, after the processing of S432, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S441 described later.

  On the other hand, in S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not “general” (when S431 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is pseudo BB (“general”). BB "or" BB during AT ") is determined (S433).

  In S433, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is the pseudo BB (when S433 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a BB_variable setting process (S434). Details of the BB_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S434, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S441 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S433 that the gaming state (next time) is not in the pseudo BB state (when S433 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “AT ready”. It is determined whether or not (S435).

  In S435, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “AT ready” (when S435 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparing_variable setting processing (S436). The details of the AT preparing_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S436, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S441 described later.

  On the other hand, in S435, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not “AT ready” (when S435 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (next time) “AT in progress”. It is determined whether or not (S437).

  In S437, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “AT in progress” (when S437 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an AT in_variable setting process (S438). Details of the AT_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S438, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S441 described later.

  On the other hand, in S437, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not “AT” (when S437 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “race”. It is determined whether or not (S439).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S439 that the gaming state (next time) is not “race” (when S439 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S441 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S439 that the gaming state (next time) is “race” (when S439 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a racing_variable setting process (S440). Details of the in-race_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later. Then, after the processing of S440, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S441 described later.

  After the processing of S432, S434, S436, S438, or S440, or when S439 is NO, the sub CPU 102 indicates the end of the game in which the game state (current) is “general” (hereinafter referred to as “general end”). ) Is determined (S441).

  In S441, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general end” (when S441 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general end_variable setting processing (S442). Details of the general end time_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S442, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S449 described later.

  On the other hand, in S441, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “general end” (when S441 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general BB”. It is determined whether or not it is at the end of the game (hereinafter referred to as “at the end of general BB”) (S443).

  In S443, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “when the general medium BB ends” (when S443 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general medium BB end_variable setting process. (S444). The details of the general medium BB end_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S444, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S449 described later.

  On the other hand, in S443, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “at the end of general BB” (when S443 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “race”. It is determined whether or not the game has ended (hereinafter referred to as “race end”) (S445).

  In S445, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “at the end of the race” (when S445 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a race end_variable setting process (S446). Details of the race end_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S446, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S449 described later.

  On the other hand, in S445, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “at the end of the race” (when S445 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT BB”. It is determined whether or not the game is over (hereinafter referred to as “at end of BB during AT”) (S447).

  In S447, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “at end of BB during AT” (when S447 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S449 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S447 that the gaming state (current) is “at end of BB during AT” (when S447 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends at BB end during AT_variable setting process. Is performed (S448). Note that the details of the AT-BB end_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S448, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S449 described later.

  After the processing of S442, S444, S446, or S448, or when S447 is NO, the sub CPU 102 initializes “the number of G (game) added directly over AT” (S449). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the number of added AT games. Then, after the process of S449, the sub CPU 102 ends the variable setting process, and moves the process to S412 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  In addition, although not shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the series of processing of determining the game state (next time) and the variable setting process described above during the variable setting process, the game state (next time) is actually “ A process for determining whether or not one of “W chance” and “Additional challenge” is being performed, and a variable setting process in these sub gaming states is also performed. In the variable setting process when the gaming state (next time) is “W chance”, “5” is set as the number of bell navigations.

  Further, although not shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the series of processing of determining the game state (current) and the variable setting process described above during the variable setting process, the game state (current) is actually “ A process for determining whether or not one of “W chance” and “Additional challenge” is being performed, and a variable setting process in these sub gaming states is also performed. In the variable setting process when the gaming state (current) is “W chance”, “5” is set as the number of bell navigations.

[General_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the general medium_variable setting process performed in S432 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general”) (S451).

  In S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when S451 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_variable setting process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S441 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S451 is YES), the sub CPU 102 indicates that the gaming state (current) is “race”. It is determined whether or not there is (S452).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S452 that the gaming state (current) is not “race” (when S452 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general_variable setting process, and the process is the variable setting process. The process moves to S441 (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  On the other hand, in S452, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “race” (when S452 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the next period ( The number of shortened games (the number of next shortened games) in the non-AT game period of the next set is calculated (S453).

  In addition, “Oyado points” is the total number of shortened games for the surplus generated by the cycle shortening lottery (which may be performed multiple times) performed during the normal game of the current cycle (current set), and This corresponds to the total number of games of all the shortened games for the surplus generated by the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery (which may be performed a plurality of times) performed during the pseudo BB game.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “180” in the cycle counter (S454). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the next number of shortened games calculated in S453 from the value (180) of the cycle counter (S455). By this processing, the subtraction result is set as the number of stay games in the normal state in the next set. Then, after the process of S455, the sub CPU 102 ends the general_variable setting process, and moves the process to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  Note that, as described above, in S455 of the general_variable setting process of the present embodiment, the number of next shortened games (the number of surplus reduced games in the current set) from the number of set games (180 games) of the next set of normal games. Is subtracted, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means for subtracting the surplus number of shortened games from the number of set games for the next set of normal games (game number subtraction means).

[In BB_Variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the BB variable setting process performed in S434 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general BB” or “AT BB”) (S461).

  In S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when S461 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB variable setting process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S441 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S461 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S461 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a value of “0” for the BB precursor counter. Whether or not (S462).

  In S462, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” (when S462 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB in-variable setting process, and the process is the variable setting process ( The process proceeds to S441 in FIGS. 97 and 98.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S462 that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (when S462 is YES), the sub CPU 102 resets the value of the BB precursor counter (“−1”). Set) (S463). After the process of S463, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB variable setting process, and moves the process to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[Under AT preparation_Variable setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, an AT preparation_variable setting process performed in S436 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT ready”) (S471).

  In S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when S471 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_variable setting processing and performs processing. Is shifted to S441 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S471 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S471 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winning flag”, “race runner map” "," Race Winning Rate Map "and" Race Consecutive Loss Counter "are cleared (S472).

  The “race victory flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the set “race winner” (race winner (candidate)) wins the race production. When the “race winner” wins the race, , “1” is set in the “race victory flag”. The “race consecutive loss counter” is a counter that manages the number of times that the set “race winner” continuously loses the race effect (the number of times that the AT is not continuously won). In the present embodiment, when the “race winner” loses 10 times in the race effect (at the ceiling), the winning combination is AT.

  Then, after the processing of S472, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S441 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[AT variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the AT-in-variable setting process performed in S438 in the variable setting process flowchart (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT ready”) (S481). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S481 that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when S481 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-in-variable setting process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S441 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S481 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S481 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the number of penalty games ( S482). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter (S483).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S484). After the process of S484, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT variable setting process, and moves the process to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[Race_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the in-race_variable setting process performed in S440 in the variable setting process flowchart (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  The sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter (S491). Then, after the processing of S491, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S441 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[General end_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the general end time_variable setting process performed in S442 in the variable setting process flowchart (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“general end time”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S501).

  In S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when S501 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general end time_variable setting process, Is shifted to S449 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S501 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S501 is YES), the sub CPU 102 clears the “winning combination history” (S502). .

  The “winning role history” is data representing the winning history of internal winning combinations (including “losing”, “small role”, and “replay”) for five games, and is used for the cycle shortened lottery and the directly added lottery. It is done.

  After the process of S502, the sub CPU 102 ends the general end time_variable setting process, and moves the process to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[General BB end_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the general medium BB end_variable setting process performed in S444 in the variable setting process flowchart (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“general BB”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S511).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) in S511 (when S511 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB end_variable setting process. The process proceeds to S449 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S511 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S511 is YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the “BB game counter” (“−” 1 ”is set) (S512). The “BB game counter” is a counter that manages the number of remaining games in the JACIN challenge section (the section in which the push order 2-choice game for JACGAME is played).

  After the processing of S512, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium BB end_variable setting process, and moves the process to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[Race end_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the race end time_variable setting process performed in S446 in the variable setting process flowchart (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) ("race") is different from the gaming state (next time) (S521).

  In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the race end_variable setting process, Is shifted to S449 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S521 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S521 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that “the number of racing games” and “race occurrence flag”. Then, the data of “post-AT race flag” and “race winning percentage rewrite flag” are cleared (S522).

  The “race game number” is data for managing the number of elapsed games (1 to 10 games) of the race effect performed in the transition effect game, and the “race occurrence flag” indicates whether or not the race effect is generated. It is a flag to show. The “AT race flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a race effect is generated after AT, and the “Race win rate rewriting flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the race win rate data is rewritten. Although a detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when a “rare role” is won in a game in a normal state, a lottery for increasing the race win rate is performed. When the winning lottery of the race winning rate is won, the “race winning rate rewriting flag” is turned on.

  Then, after the processing of S522, the sub CPU 102 ends the race end_variable setting processing, and moves the processing to S449 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[At BB end during AT_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, an AT_BB end time_variable setting process performed in S448 in the variable setting process flowchart (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“AT BB”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S531).

  In S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when S531 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT BB end_variable setting process. The process proceeds to S449 in the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S531 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S531 is YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the “BB game counter” (“−” 1 ”is set) (S532). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the number of penalty games (S533).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter (S534). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S535). Then, after the process of S535, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-time BB end_variable setting process, and moves the process to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[Out of ball status update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a description will be given of the appearance state update process performed in S412 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the start command reception process.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (S541).

  In S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous) is not different from the gaming state (current) (when S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S543 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S541 that the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (when S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the gaming state (previous) to the gaming state (current). Is set (S542).

  After the processing of S542 or when S541 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S543). In S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ball status update process and starts the process. The process proceeds to S413 in the command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S543 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the gaming state (current) to the gaming state (next time). Is set (S544). Then, after the process of S544, the sub CPU 102 ends the appearance state update process, and moves the process to S413 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

[Bns state setting process]
Next, the Bns state setting process performed in S413 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “BB winning” (S551).

  In S551, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB winning” (when S551 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB winning_Bns state setting processing (S552). Details of the BB winning time_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later. Then, after the process of S552, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process, and moves the process to S414 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S551, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB winning” (when S551 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags”. Is discriminated (S553).

  In S553, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” (when S553 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB flag inter-Bns state setting processing (S554). The details of the BB flag inter-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. After the process of S554, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process, and moves the process to S414 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S553 that the pseudo BB state is not “between BB flags” (when S553 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “waiting for BB operation”. Is discriminated (S555).

  In S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “waiting for BB operation” (when S555 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process (S556). Details of the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. After the process of S556, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process, and moves the process to S414 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S555 that the pseudo BB state is not “waiting for BB operation” (when S555 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “in BB”. A determination is made (S557).

  In S557, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB” (when S557 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a BB in-Bns state setting process (S558). The details of the BB_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. After the process of S558, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process, and moves the process to S414 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S557 that the pseudo BB state is not “BB” (when S557 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “JAC”. (S559).

  In S559, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “JAC in progress” (S559 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs JAC in-Bns state setting processing (S560). Details of the JAC_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later. After the process of S560, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process, and moves the process to S414 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S559, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “JAC” (when S559 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “Cha BB”. (S561).

  In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “Cha BB” (when S 561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a Cha BB_Bns state setting process (S562). Details of the ChaBB_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later. After the process of S562, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process, and moves the process to S414 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “ChaBB” (when S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC”. (S563).

  In S563, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC in progress” (when S563 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs ChaJAC in-Bns state setting processing (S564). The details of the ChaJAC_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later. After the process of S564, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process, and moves the process to S414 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S563 that the pseudo BB state is not “ChaJAC in progress” (in the case where S563 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process, and the process is performed when a start command is received. The process moves to S414 in (see FIG. 96).

[BB winning state_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the BB winning time_Bns state setting process performed in S552 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to “between BB flags” (S571). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an inter-BB flag_Bns state setting process (S572). The details of the BB flag inter-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. After the process of S572, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB winning time_Bns state setting process and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[BB flag inter-Bns state setting process]
Next, referring to FIG. 111, BB flag interval_Bns performed in S554 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or S572 in the flowchart of the BB winning time_Bns state setting process (see FIG. 110). The state setting process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “general BB” or “AT BB” (S581).

  In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “general BB” or “AT BB” (when S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S583 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S581 that the gaming state (current) is “general BB” or “AT BB” (when S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “ A transition is made to "waiting for BB operation" (S582).

  After the process of S582 or when S581 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process (S583). Details of the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Then, after the process of S583, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB flag inter-Bns state setting process and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or the BB winning time_Bns state setting process (see FIG. 110).

[BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process]
Next, referring to FIG. 112, BB operation waiting_Bns performed in S556 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or S583 in the flowchart of the inter-BB flag_Bns state setting process (see FIG. 111). The state setting process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “BB entry flag” is on (S591). The “BB entry flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the pseudo BB state shifts from “BB operation waiting” to “BB in progress”. When the flag is on, the pseudo BB state is “ The process proceeds to “BB in progress” and the pseudo BB game is started.

  In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry flag is not in the on state (when S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation wait_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 109). (Refer to FIG. 111).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S591 that the BB entry flag is on (when S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry flag off (S592). Next, the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to “in BB” (S593).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an initial value “2” to “BB guaranteed JAC number” (S594). The “BB guaranteed JAC count” is the number of JACIN successes (JACGAME execution count) guaranteed in the JACGAME guaranteed section, and in this embodiment, JACGAME is guaranteed twice in the JACGAME guaranteed section.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an initial value “10” as the value of the BB game counter (S595).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets an initial value “5” as the value of “JAC bell navigation number” (S596). In the present embodiment, the game period of one JACGAME is managed by the number of times of navigating the small role (bell number of times) related to “push order bell” (CT bell) in which 10 medals are paid out, 5 times. When the number of times of the bell navigation is finished, one JACGAME game period is finished. “JAC bell navigation number” represents the remaining number of bell navigations in JACGAME.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the “penalty flag” (S597). The “penalty flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a penalty has occurred. After the processing of S597, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or the BB flag inter_Bns state setting process (see FIG. 111).

[In-BB_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the BB in-Bns state setting process performed in S558 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “BARJAC entry flag” is in an on state (S601). The “BARJAC entry flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the transition to the “JAC in progress” of the pseudo BB state has been determined. The “BARJAC rush flag” has a predetermined symbol combination (in this embodiment, “black BAR”-“black BAR”-“black BAR” or “black cherry”-“black BAR”-“black BAR”) It turns on when it is stopped and displayed above.

  In S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC rush flag is not on (when S601 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB in-Bns state setting process and also performs the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S601 that the BARJAC rush flag is on (when S601 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BAR JAC rush flag off (S602). Next, the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to “JAC in progress” (S603).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of BB guaranteed JACs is greater than “0” (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is not greater than “0” (when S604 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB in-Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process. (See FIG. 109) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than “0” in S604 (when S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the BB guaranteed JAC number (S605). After the process of S605, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB in-Bns state setting process and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[JAC in_Bns state setting process]
Next, the JAC in-Bns state setting process performed in S560 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of times of JAC bell navigation is “0” (S611). In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is not “0” (when S611 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the JAC in-Bns state setting process and also sets the Bns state setting process (FIG. 109). See also).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S611 that the number of JAC bell navigation is “0” (when S611 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB guaranteed JAC number is greater than “0”. (S612).

  In S612, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is not greater than “0” (when S612 is NO), the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to “ChaBB in progress” (S613). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S612 that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is greater than “0” (when S612 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “in BB” (S614). .

  After the processing of S613 or S614, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value “5” to the value of the number of times of JAC bell navigation (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the sub CPU 102 ends the JAC in-Bns state setting process and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[ChaBB_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the ChaBB in-Bns state setting process performed in S562 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB game counter is less than “0” (S621).

  In S621, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB game counter is not less than “0” (when S621 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S623 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S621 that the BB game counter is less than “0” (S621 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to “none” (S622). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub gaming state returns from the pseudo BB state to the normal state.

  After the process of S622 or when S621 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC rush flag is on (S623). In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC rush flag is not on (when S623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaBB_Bns state setting process and also performs the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S623 that the BARJAC rush flag is on (when S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BAR JAC rush flag off (S624). Next, the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to “ChaJAC in progress” (S625).

  Then, after the processing of S625, the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaBB in-Bns state setting process and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[In ChaJAC_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the ChaJAC in-Bns state setting process performed in S564 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of times of JAC bell navigation is “0” (S631). In S631, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is not “0” (when S631 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaJAC in-Bns state setting process and also sets the Bns state setting process (FIG. 109). See also).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S631 that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is “0” (when S631 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is greater than “0”. A determination is made (S632).

  In S632, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not greater than “0” (when S632 is NO), the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to “none” (S633). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub gaming state returns from the pseudo BB state to the AT state. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S632 that the value of the BB game counter is greater than “0” (when S632 is YES), the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to “ChaBB in progress” (S634). ).

  After the processing of S633 or S634, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value “5” to the value of the number of times of JAC bell navigation (S635). Then, after the processing of S635, the sub CPU 102 ends the ChaJAC_Bns state setting process and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[General _Processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117 and FIG. 118, the general medium_game start process performed in S415 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the period counter is greater than “0” (S641).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S641 that the value of the cycle counter is not greater than “0” (when S641 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S643 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S641 that the value of the cycle counter is greater than “0” (when S641 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the cycle counter (S642).

  After the processing of S642 or when S641 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information MAP data is “0” (S643). In the present embodiment, as described above, five pieces of race information MAP data (“1” to “10”) up to four races ahead (first to fifth races) are stored in advance at the start of normal game set. Although the race information MAP data of the end race is deleted each time a race effect is finished, the race information MAP data from the next set on is stored in the storage area on the head side. Stored shifted. At this time, “0” is stored as race information MAP data in the last storage area that is empty. Therefore, in the process of S643, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information data in the storage area to be referenced is empty.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information MAP data is “0” in S643 (when S643 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the race information lottery process described with reference to FIG. 94 (S644). That is, if the information on the content of the race production of the current set (the type of the teammate character who will be the race victory target (candidate), the race win rate data of the teammate character) is not set, the game of the current set of normal games Information on the content of the race performance is determined by lottery at the start of the period. At this time, information on the content of the race production from the current set to the fourth set ahead (1st to 5th races) is determined. Then, after the processing of S644, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S643 that the race information MAP data is not “0” (when S643 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is “in race”. Is discriminated (S645). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S645 that the gaming state (previous) is not “race” (when S645 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous) is “race” in S645 (when S645 is YES), the sub CPU 102 satisfies the re-lottery condition of the race starter MAP. It is determined whether or not there is (S646). In the present embodiment, the race lotter MAP's re-lottery condition is when the number of consecutive losses of the race (the value of the race consecutive loss counter) is “5”.

  In S646, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the re-lotting condition for the race starter MAP is not satisfied (when S646 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S649 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S646 that the re-lotting condition for the race starter MAP is satisfied (when S646 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the race starter MAP lottery table (see FIG. 32). Referring to, a race starter MAP lottery process is performed (S647). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result value (race information MAP number) of the race starter MAP lottery process to “race starter MAP” (S648).

  After the processing of S648 or when S646 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 33) and determines the race information based on the value of the “race starter MAP” (race information MAP number). The type (target tables A to J) of the winning person lottery table (see FIG. 34) corresponding to the MAP data is determined (S649). In this process, based on the set race starter MAP (race information MAP), the “target table” (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data for the first four races (first to fifth races) Any one of A to J) is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the “target table” for the determined first to fifth races (S650).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery processing for the race victory target (candidate) persons from the first race to the fifth race based on the “target table” from the first race to the fifth race set in S650 ( S651). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the victory subject lottery process to “race winner” (S652). Through this process, the race winners from race 1 to race 5 (“Men A”, “Men B”, “Woman A”, “Tengu”, “Kappa” and “Men A / M B”) Is set to “Race Winner”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 checks the race winning rate data of the current set (S653).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “race information data” is “0” (S654). “Race information data” refers to race win rate data, and in the process of S654, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current set of race win rate data is set.

  In S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information data is not “0” (when S654 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information data is “0” in S654 (when S654 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the race winning rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 35), and races. Win rate MAP lottery processing is performed (S655). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the race win rate MAP that defines the race win rate data of the “race winner” (race winner) set in S652 based on the current set value (any one of 1 to 6). To decide.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the “race win rate map” (S656).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 36), and acquires race win rate data corresponding to the set “race win rate map” (S657). In this process, as shown in FIG. 36, only the race win rate data for the current race (the first race) may be determined, or the race win rate data for the second and subsequent races may also be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race winning percentage data acquired in S657 (S658).

  After the process of S644 or S658, or when S645 or S654 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery process (S659). The details of the pseudo BB lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is “0” (S660). In S660, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not “0” (when S660 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start process, and starts the process when the start command is received. The process moves to S426 in (see FIG. 96). That is, when the current game is in a penalty, the period shortening related process of S661 described later is not performed, and the benefit of shortening the number of games in the normal game cannot be obtained.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S660 that the number of penalty games is “0” (when S660 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a cycle shortening related process (S661). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle shortened lottery table (see FIGS. 44 and 45) and performs the cycle shortened lottery based on the data of “winning combination history”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “10” or more and the “race occurrence flag” is in an off state (S662).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S662 that the determination condition in S662 is not satisfied (in the case where S662 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the “Oyado Point” is the lottery result of the cycle shortened lottery determined in S661. The corresponding number of shortened games is added (S663).

  After the processing of S663, the sub CPU 102 performs a race victory expectation degree data up lottery with reference to a race victory expectation degree lottery table (not shown) (S664). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery in the race win rate data (S665). Then, after the processing of S665, the sub CPU 102 ends the general_game start process, and moves the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S662 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S662 (when S662 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the lottery result (shortened) of the cycle shortening lottery determined in S661 from the value of the cycle counter. The number of games) is subtracted, and the calculation result is set to the value of the period counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the period counter after subtraction is less than “10” (S666).

  In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is not less than “10” (when S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game start process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S426 in the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the period counter after subtraction is less than “10” (when S666 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the surplus corresponding to the calculation (subtraction) result. Is added to the “Oyado points” (S667). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “10” to the value of the cycle counter (S668). Then, after the processing of S668, the sub CPU 102 ends the general_game start process, and moves the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  Note that, as described above, in S661 of the general medium_game start process of the present embodiment, a shortened lottery of the game period of the normal game is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (normal game shortening means, first normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game in the normal game. In addition, in S667 of the general medium_game start process, the subtraction result is obtained when the value obtained by subtracting the number of shortened games determined by the normal game cycle shortening lottery from the remaining number of unit games of the base game is less than 10 games. Is stocked as the number of surplus reduced games. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for stocking the subtraction result as a surplus number of shortened games when the subtraction result is less than 10 games (surplus game number stock means).

[Pseudo BB lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the pseudo BB lottery process performed in S659 in the flowchart of the general medium_game start process (see FIGS. 117 and 118) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” or more (S671). In S671, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” or more (when S671 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and the process is in general_games. The process proceeds to S660 of the start time process (see FIGS. 117 and 118).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S671 that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” or more (when S671 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general”. It is determined whether or not (S672).

  In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “general” (when S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery (AT / AT preparation / race) table. Referring to FIG. 42, a pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S673). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S672 that the gaming state (current) is “general” (when S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the pseudo BB lottery (general) table (see FIG. 41). ), A pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S674).

  After the processing of S673 or S674, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB lottery has been won (S675). In S675, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has not won the pseudo BB lottery (when S675 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and the process is in general_game start process (FIG. 117). And the process proceeds to S660 of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S675 that the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo BB lottery (when S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “at the time of BB winning” in the pseudo BB state (S676). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB precursor lottery table (see FIG. 43) and performs a pseudo BB precursor lottery process based on the internal winning combination (S677).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the pseudo BB precursor lottery (number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game) in the BB precursor counter (S678). Then, after the process of S678, the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and moves the process to S660 of the general medium_game start process (see FIGS. 117 and 118).

  Note that, as described above, the pseudo BB lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means for determining execution of the pseudo BB game (special game determination means).

[General BB_Game Start Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the general middle BB_game start time process performed in S417 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the start command reception time process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is “0” (S681).

  In S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not “0” (when S681 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S683 described later. That is, when the current game is in a penalty, the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) in S682 described later is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB entry check flag (the process of shifting to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state where the pseudo BB game is not started occurs.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S681 that the number of penalty games is “0” (when S681 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) (S682). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages on / off of the “BB entry check flag” provided for checking the occurrence of “command spill”. The details of the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) (S683). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages on / off of a “BARJAC entry check flag” provided for checking the occurrence of “command spill”. Details of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BB counter management processing (S684). Details of the BB counter management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is on (S685).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S685 that the race occurrence flag is on (in the case where S685 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to a race winning winning rate lottery table (not shown) and increases the winning rate after winning the race. Processing is performed (S686). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning process after winning the race winning lottery process in the race winning percentage data (S687). Then, after the processing of S687, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S695 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S685 that the race occurrence flag is not on (when S685 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “1” or more. (S688). In S688, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not “1” or more (when S688 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S695 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S688 that the value of the cycle counter is “1” or more (when S688 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table (see FIG. 46). Then, based on the “winning combination history”, pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery processing is performed (S689). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the number of shortened games determined by the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process from the current cycle counter value, and sets the calculation result in the cycle counter (S690).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter after the arithmetic processing in S690 is “0” or less (S691). In S691, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not “0” or less (when S691 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S695 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S691 that the value of the cycle counter is equal to or less than “0” (when S691 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the race occurrence flag on (S692). By this process, the race effect of the transition effect game is started after the end of the pseudo BB game.

  Subsequently, the surplus number of shortened games (absolute value of the calculation result) corresponding to the value of the calculation result of S690 is added to the “hotel point” (S693). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the period counter (S694). Then, after the processing of S694, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S695 described later.

  After the processing of S687 or S694, or when S688 or S691 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a push order navigation lottery process of a small role related to “push order bell”. (S695). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S696). After the process of S696, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium BB_game start process, and moves the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, in S689 of the general BB_game start process of the present embodiment, the game period shortened lottery (pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery) of the normal game is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. Is done. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (second normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game in the pseudo BB game.

[BB entry determination process (at start of game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) performed in S682 in the general BB_game start process flowchart (see FIG. 120) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB entry check flag is on (S701).

  In S701, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not on (when S701 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S703 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S701 that the BB entry check flag is on (when S701 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the penalty flag on (S702).

  After the processing of S702 or when S701 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB entry check flag (S703). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “Race” (S704).

  In S704, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “race” (when S704 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “waiting for BB operation”. A determination is made (S705). In S705, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “waiting for BB operation” (in the case of NO determination in S705), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) and performs the general process. The process proceeds to S683 in the middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, in S705, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB operation waiting” (when S705 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “normal lip 1” to “normal lip”. 8 ”is determined (S706).

  In S706, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8” (NO in S706), the sub CPU 102 determines the BB entry determination process (game start) ) And the process proceeds to S683 in the general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S706, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is any one of “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8” (when S706 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the BB entry check flag. Is turned on (S707). Then, after the process of S707, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game), and moves the process to S683 of the general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

  Here, returning to the processing of S704 again, in S704, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “race in progress” (when S704 is YES), the sub CPU 102 indicates that the pseudo BB state is “ It is determined whether or not “between BB flags” (S708). In S708, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “between BB flags” (in the case where S708 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game), and performs the process in general. The process proceeds to S683 in the middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, in S708, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” (when S708 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “normal lip 2” or “normal lip”. 4 ”is determined (S709).

  In S709, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not “normal lip 2” or “normal lip 4” (NO in S709), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game). The process ends, and the process proceeds to S683 of the general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “normal lip 2” or “normal lip 4” in S709 (when S709 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB entry check flag. (S710). Then, after the process of S710, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game), and moves the process to S683 of the general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

[BBJAC transition determination process (at start of game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) performed in S683 in the general BB_game start process flowchart (see FIG. 120) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC inrush check flag is on (S721). In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush check flag is not on (when S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S725 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S721 that the BARJAC inrush check flag is on (in the case where S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress”. (S722). In S722, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB” (when S722 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S725 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S722 that the pseudo BB state is “BB” (when S722 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC inrush flag (S723). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB in-Bns state setting process described in FIG. 113 (S724). Then, after the processing of S724, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S725 described later.

  After the process of S724, or when S721 or S722 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC inrush check flag (S725).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress” or “ChaBB in progress” (S726). In S726, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB” or “ChaBB” (when S726 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game). Then, the process proceeds to S684 of the general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB” or “ChaBB” in S726 (when S726 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “normal lip 1”. It is determined whether or not any one of “normal lip 8” and “bell lip 1” to “bell lip 4” (S727).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S727 that the internal winning combination is not one of “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8” and “bell lip 1” to “bell lip 4” (when S727 is NO), The CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game), and moves the process to S684 of the general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S727 that the internal winning combination is any one of “normal lip 1” to “normal lip 8” and “bell lip 1” to “bell lip 4” (when S727 is YES) ) The sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC inrush check flag (S728). After the process of S728, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game), and moves the process to S684 of the general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

[BB counter management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the BB counter management process performed in S684 in the general BB_game start process flowchart (see FIG. 120) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (S731). In S731, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “ChaBB” (when S731 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S734 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S731 that the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (when S731 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is greater than “0”. Is discriminated (S732).

  In S732, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not greater than “0” (when S732 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S734 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S732 that the value of the BB game counter is greater than “0” (when S732 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the BB game counter (S733). ). Then, after the processing of S733, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S734 described later.

  After the processing of S733 or when S731 or S732 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “JAC in progress” or “Cha JAC in progress” (S734).

  In S734, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “JAC in progress” or “Cha JAC in progress” (when S734 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management processing and is in general processing. The process shifts to S685 in the BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S734 that the pseudo BB state is “JAC in progress” or “Cha JAC in progress” (when S734 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “push order bell”. It is determined whether or not (CT bell: any one of winning numbers “17” to “48”) (S735).

  In S735, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not “push order bell” (when S735 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process, and the process is in progress. The process proceeds to S685 in the processing (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S735 that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (when S735 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of times of JAC bell navigation is greater than “0”. It is determined (S736).

  In S736, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times of JAC bell navigation is not greater than “0” (when S736 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process, and the process is in a general BB_game start time. The process proceeds to S685 in the processing (see FIG. 120).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in step S736 that the JAC bell navigation count is greater than “0” (in the case where S736 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the JAC bell navigation count (S737). Then, after the process of S737, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process, and moves the process to S685 of the general medium BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

[Processing at the start of the game during the race]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a description will be given of the in-race_game start time process performed in S419 in the flowchart of the start command reception time process (see FIG. 96).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is “0” (S741).

  In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not “0” (when S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S743 described later. That is, when the current game is in a penalty, the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) in S742 described later is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB entry check flag (the process of shifting to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state where the pseudo BB game is not started occurs.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S741 that the number of penalty games is “0” (when S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) described in FIG. This is performed (S742).

  After the processing of S742 or when S741 is NO, the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the number of racing games (S743).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is “1” (S744). In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of racing games is not “1” (when S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S749 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S744 that the number of racing games is “1” (when S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is set with reference to the race result lottery table (see FIG. 38). A race result lottery process is performed on the basis of the race win rate data (S745). In this process, the result of the race effect performed in the transition effect game (winning win / non-winning) is determined. That is, in this embodiment, the race result (AT game win / no-win) is determined by lottery in the first game (start game) of the race effect.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race win is won by the race result lottery (whether or not the AT is won), or the value of the race consecutive loss counter (continuous non-execution number counting means) is “9” or more. It is determined whether or not to determine (S746).

  In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S746 is satisfied (when S746 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S747). Then, after the processing of S747, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S749 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S746 that the determination condition of S746 is not satisfied (when S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the race consecutive loss counter (S748). Then, after the processing of S748, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S749 described later.

  In the present embodiment, when the race win rate data rewriting lottery described later (S945 in FIG. 137) is won, the race win rate is rewritten to 0% (when penalty processing based on the penalty counter is performed). In S748, the addition process of the race consecutive loss counter (ceiling counter) is not performed. In this case, the number of ceiling cycles of the normal game for which AT winning is determined is substantially extended.

  After the process of S747 or S748, or when S744 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 119 (S749). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “BB winning” (S750).

  In S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “BB winning” (when S750 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S752 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S750 that the pseudo BB state is “BB winning” (when S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the race victory flag on (S751).

  After the processing of S751 or when S750 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation” (S752). In S752, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation” (when S752 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S755 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S752 that the pseudo BB state is “between BB flags” or “waiting for BB operation” (when S752 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the direct addition lottery table (FIG. 47A). Referring to FIG. 47B), on the basis of the “winning combination history”, an additional lottery process (directly added lottery process) for the number of AT games is performed (S753). At this time, if the penalty flag is in the off state, the direct addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to. If the penalty flag is in the on state, the direct addition lottery (in FIG. 47B) Penalty flag ON: During race) The table is referenced. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of added AT games) of the directly added lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S754).

  After the processing of S754 or when S752 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a push order navigation lottery process of a small role related to “push order bell” (S755). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S756). After the process of S756, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the race_game start, and moves the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, AT lottery is performed in S745 of the in-race_game start process of the present embodiment, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (notification game determination means) for determining whether or not to play an AT game.

[Under AT preparation_Processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the AT preparation_game start process performed in S421 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the start command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described in FIG. 119 (S761). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) (S762).

  In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) (when S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S775 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (previous) in S762 (when S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male A”. Is determined (S763).

  In step S763, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male A” (when S763 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process when the male A wins_game start (S764). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of AT games (the number of basic stay games in the AT state) according to the content of the AT start game number determination game when the “male A” wins. In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing of S764, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S763 that the “race winner” is not “male A” (when S763 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “race winner” is “male B”. It is determined whether or not (S765).

  In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male B” (in the case where S765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the man B wins_game start (S766). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game in accordance with the content of the AT start game number determination game when the “male B” wins. In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. After the process of S766, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S765 that the “race winner” is not “male B” (when S765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the “race winner” is “female A”. It is determined whether or not (S767).

  In S767, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “female A” (when S767 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process when the female A wins_game start (S768). . In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game in accordance with the content of the AT start game number determination game when the “woman A” wins. The details of the process at the time of female A victory_game start will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later. Then, after the processing of S768, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S767 that the “race winner” is not “woman A” (when S767 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “race winner” is “kappa”. Is determined (S769).

  In S769, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “Kappa” (when S769 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of winning Kappa_starting the game (S770). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game in accordance with the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory. Details of the Kappa victory_game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 described later. Then, after the processing of S770, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S769 that the “race winner” is not “kappa” (when S769 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “race winner” is “Tengu”. Is discriminated (S771).

  In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “Tengu” (when S771 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process when Tengu wins_game start (S772). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of the above-mentioned “Tengu” victory. In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing of S772, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, in S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is not “Tengu” (when S771 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that “race winner” is “male A / male B”. It is determined whether or not there is (S773). In S773, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is not “male A / male B” (when S773 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S775 described later.

  On the other hand, in S773, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the “race winner” is “male A / male B” (when S773 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the man A / m B wins_game. Processing at the start is performed (S774). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number of the AT game in accordance with the content of the AT start game number determination game when the “male A / male B” wins. In this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing of S774, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S775 described later.

  After S764, S766, S768, S770, S772 or S774, if S762 is YES, or if S773 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), Is performed in the push order navigation lottery process for the small role relating to "" (S775). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S776). After the process of S776, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game start process, and moves the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

[Woman A wins_game start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a description will be given of the female A victory_game start process performed in S768 in the AT preparation_game start process flowchart (see FIG. 125).

  First, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag (S781). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines an AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table (see FIGS. 48A and 48B) used in the AT start game number determination process (S782).

  In the process of S782, the AT start game number is increased by 50 games in one MAX bet operation and the continuation probability is 50%, and the AT start game in one MAX bet operation. An AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table corresponding to one of the second modes in which 5 games are added and the continuation probability is 95% is determined. In this embodiment, in S782, it is set so that the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table (see FIG. 48B) corresponding to the second mode is automatically determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in S782, the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table (see FIG. 48A) corresponding to the first mode may be automatically determined.

  Then, after the process of S782, the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the female A wins_game start, and moves the process to S775 of the AT preparation_game start process (see FIG. 125).

[When Kappa wins _Processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the Kappa victory_game start process performed in S770 in the AT preparation_game start process flowchart (see FIG. 125) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the kappa sushi MAP data (see FIG. 53) of the current game is “0” (whether or not the kappa sushi MAP is set) (S791).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi MAP data is not “0” in S791 (when S791 is NO), the sub CPU 102 moves the kappa sushi MAP data from the next game onward to the top storage area. Move one (S792). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores the second plate to the tenth plate of kappa sushi MAP data (any one of “1” to “8” is stored or is empty (“0”)). The shift is made to the storage area for the kappa sushi MAP data for the ninth to ninth dishes, respectively, and the storage area for the kappa sushi MAP data for the tenth dish is emptied ("0" is stored). Then, after the processing of S792, the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S797 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi MAP data is “0” in S791 (when S791 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (FIG. 49). Referring to FIG. 52), kappa sushi MAP lottery processing is performed (S793). By this process, the number “Kappa Sushi MAP” is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the kappa sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 53), and based on the number of the “kappa sushi MAP” determined in S793, the kappa sushi MAP data ( Sushi data) is acquired (S794).

  After the processing of S794, the sub CPU 102 sets the kappa sushi MAP data from the first dish to the tenth dish acquired in S794 (S795). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores the kappa sushi MAP data from the first dish to the tenth dish specified in the kappa sushi MAP in the corresponding storage area. Next, the sub CPU 685 sets an initial value “5” to the kappa end counter (S796).

  After the processing of S792 or S796, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sixth plate of kappa sushi MAP data is empty (“0”) (S797). When the sub CPU 102 determines in step S797 that the sixth plate of kappa sushi MAP data is not empty (NO in step S797), the sub CPU 102 performs processing in step S801 described below.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in step S797 that the sixth plate of kappa sushi MAP data is empty (when S797 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins). Referring to the tables (see FIGS. 49 to 52), kappa sushi MAP lottery processing is performed based on the current kappa sushi MAP number (S798). By this process, the number of “Kappa Sushi MAP” set in the sixth dish is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the kappa sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 53), and acquires 10 dishes of kappa sushi MAP data based on the number of “kappa sushi MAP” determined in S798 (S799). . Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the kappa sushi MAP data for 10 dishes specified in the kappa sushi MAP acquired in S799 in the storage areas for the sixth and subsequent dishes that are empty (S800).

  After the process of S800 or when S797 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “group 1 combination” (S801). The “group 1 combination” is an internal winning combination corresponding to any of the winning numbers “9” to “14”, and “213 bell 1” to “213 bell 8”, “231 bell 1” to “231”. Inside of any of "Bell 8", "312 Bell 1" to "312 Bell 8", "321 Bell 1" to "321 Bell 8", "1xx 3 Bells", "2xx 3 Bells" and "3xx 3 Bells" It is a winning role.

  In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not “group 1 combination” (when S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery table (see FIG. 55), Based on the internal winning combination, kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery processing is performed (S802).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery has been won (S803). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi data conversion occurrence lottery has not been won in S803 (when S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the kappa win_game start process and prepares for AT preparation. The process proceeds to S775 in the middle_game start process (see FIG. 125).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S803 that the sub CPU 102 has won the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (when S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 reads the kappa sushi data conversion lottery table (see FIGS. 56 to 60). The conversion lottery process of the sushi material (kappa sushi MAP data) for 5 dishes (2nd dish to 6th dish) after the next game is performed (S804).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the second to sixth plates of kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) based on the lottery result of the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery processing in step S804 (S805). Then, after the processing of S805, the sub CPU 102 ends the Kappa victory_game start time processing, and shifts the processing to S775 of AT preparation_game start processing (see FIG. 125).

  Here, returning to the processing of S801 again, in S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “group 1 combination” (when S801 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of kappa games. With reference to the acquired lottery table (see FIG. 54), the number of acquired AT games is determined by lottery based on the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) (S806). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of acquired AT games to the number of currently acquired AT games (S807).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the sushi material at the time of acquiring the AT game number is “squid”, “salmon”, or “tuna” (the kappa sushi MAP data is “1”, “4”, “6”). Is determined) (S808). In step S808, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is not “squid”, “salmon”, or “tuna” (in the case where S808 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing in step S810 described below.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S808 that the sushi material is “squid”, “salmon”, or “tuna” (when S808 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the value of the kappa end counter. 1 is subtracted (S809).

  After the processing of S809 or when S808 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the kappa end counter is less than “0” (S810).

  In S810, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the kappa end counter is not less than “0” (when S810 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT games after the addition operation of S807 as “AT start game number”. ”Is set (S811). Then, after the process of S811, the sub CPU 701 ends the Kappa victory_game start process, and moves the process to S775 in the AT preparation_game start process (see FIG. 125).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S810 that the value of the kappa end counter is less than “0” (when S810 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag (S812). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “20 times” in “BET return chance” (S813).

  By the process of S813, it becomes possible to perform lottery by pressing the BET button 20 times (continuous hitting revival) as the revival lottery of the AT start game number determination game performed at the end of the Kappa victory_game start process. If the winning lottery by pressing the BET button 20 times is won, the Kappa victory time_game start time process (AT start game number acquisition process) is performed again.

  Then, after the process of S813, the sub CPU 102 ends the Kappa victory_game start process and moves the process to S775 in the AT preparation_game start process (see FIG. 125).

  Although not shown in FIG. 127, when the sushi material is “Kappaki” in the lottery process for the number of acquired AT games in S806 (when the kappa sushi MAP data is “3”), “LIFE UP” Will win. In this case, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the kappa end counter instead of a series of processes from the AT game number addition process (S807) to the kappa end counter subtraction process (S809). Done.

  As described above, in S793 of the Kappa victory_game start process of the present embodiment, 10 dishes (10 games) of sushi material (kappa sushi MA data) sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are determined. This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (addition game information determination means) for determining game information for 10 games sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the kappa sushi production.

  In addition, in S804 of the Kappa victory_game start process, if the internal winning combination is other than “group role 1” (for example, “losing”) and the lottery wins the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery, the second to sixth dishes Whether or not to rewrite the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) for the eyes is determined by lottery, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 determines whether to change the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) for the second and subsequent dishes when the internal winning combination is lost (game information change). It also serves as a determination means. In S805 of the Kappa victory_game start process, when it is decided to rewrite the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material), the second to sixth plates of kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) are rewritten. This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means (game information changing means) for changing the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) for the second and subsequent dishes.

  Also, in S807 of the Kappa victory_game start process, if the internal winning combination is “group winning 1” (the prescribed internal winning combination), the number of acquired AT games is added to the number of currently acquired AT games. This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means for adding the number of acquired AT games to the number of currently acquired AT games (unit game number adding means).

  In S807 to S809 of the Kappa victory_game start process, if the internal winning combination is “Group role 1”, the value of the Kappa end counter is updated according to the sushi material (Kappa Sushi MA data) (“ 1 ”subtraction or“ 1 ”addition), and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means for updating the value of the kappa end counter (end information update means). In S811 of the Kappa victory_game start process, if the value of the Kappa end counter is less than “0” (when the game for determining the AT start game number at the time of “Kappa” victory ends), the game is acquired at that time. The total number of AT games being played is set as the number of AT start games, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 sets means (basic unit) for setting the total number of AT games acquired up to the end of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory as the AT start game number. It also serves as a means for determining the number of games). Further, in S813 of the Kappa victory_game start process, at the end of the AT start game number determination game, an AT start game number determination game reviving lottery at the time of “Kappa” victory is performed, and this process is performed by the sub-control circuit 101. Executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 performs means of performing a resurrection lottery of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory at the end of the game period of the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory ( Also serves as a return lottery means).

[Processing during AT_game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a description will be given of the AT-in-game start process performed in S423 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (S821).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S821 that the number of penalty games is not greater than “0” (when S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S823 described later. On the other hand, in S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (when S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of penalty games (S822).

  After the process of S822 or when S821 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is greater than “0” (S823).

  In S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is not greater than “0” (when S823 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S825 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S823 that the number of remaining AT games is greater than “0” (when S823 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of remaining AT games (S824).

  After the processing of S824 or when S823 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is “AT ready”. (S825). In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S825 is not satisfied (when S825 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S832 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S825 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S825 (when S825 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game number lottery end flag is in an off state (S826). ).

  The game number lottery end flag indicates whether or not the AT start game number determination processing by the player's MAX bet button 21 continuous operation (continuous stroke lottery) is completed in the game of determining the AT start game number at the time of “woman A” victory. It is a flag that determines whether or not (whether or not the pressing operation has been performed until the addition lottery of the number of AT start games is not won). In the AT start game number determination game at the time of “female A” victory, when the AT start game number determination process by the continuous bet operation of the MAX bet button 21 is completed (when the AT start game number is determined), The game number lottery end flag is turned on. However, in the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “woman A” victory, when the continuous betting operation of the MAX bet button 21 is not executed, or in the middle of consecutive lottery (the AT lottery addition lottery becomes non-winning) If the player stops pressing the MAX bet button 21, that is, if the AT start game number at the time of winning "woman A" is not determined, the game number lottery end flag is turned off. .

  In S826, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number-of-game lottery end flag is off (in the case of YES determination in S826), that is, in the previous game (the final game of the AT start game number determination game), If the number of AT start games at the time of victory has not been determined, the sub CPU 102 executes a female A_AT start game number determination process (S827). In this process, with reference to the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table (FIG. 48A or 48B) determined in the AT start game number determination game, a predetermined number of AT start games (5 games or 50 games) is determined. (Game) addition lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is a win (continuation), a predetermined AT start game number is added to the currently determined AT start game number. The details of the female A_AT start game number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, after the processing of S827, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S826. Then, the processes of S826 and S827 are repeated until the game number lottery end flag is turned off. That is, in this embodiment, when the AT start game number is not determined in the AT start game number determination game at the time of “woman A” victory, at the start of the AT game, a predetermined number of AT start games (5 games or 50 games) is added automatically, and the number of AT start games when “woman A” wins is determined.

  On the other hand, in S826, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number-of-game lottery end flag is not in an off state (when S826 is NO), that is, when the number of AT start games at the time of winning “woman A” is determined. In step S828, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process on the race victory target (candidate) person with reference to the victory target person lottery table (see FIG. 34). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the victory subject lottery process to “race winner” (S829).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race victory expectation degree data selection lottery table (see FIG. 39), and performs a win rate lottery process (post-AT race win rate lottery process) performed in the transition effect game after AT (see FIG. 39). S830). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the after-AT race winning rate lottery processing of S830 in the race winning rate data (S831).

  After the process of S831 or when S825 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 119 (S832). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly added lottery table (see FIGS. 47A and 47C), and performs an additional lottery process (directly added lottery process) for the number of AT games (S833). At this time, if the penalty flag is in the off state, the direct addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to. If the penalty flag is in the on state, the direct addition lottery (in FIG. 47C) Penalty flag ON: AT, AT BB) table is referenced. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of added AT games) of the directly added lottery process to the remaining number of AT games (S834).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small role related to “push order bell” (S835). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S836). Then, after the process of S836, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-time game start process, and moves the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, in the in-AT game start process of the present embodiment, the lottery is added for the number of AT games, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 also serves as means (notification game addition means, first notification game addition means) for determining the addition number of the unit game number of AT games in AT games. Further, in the above-described AT_game start process, if the number of AT start games is not determined in the transition effect game at the time of “woman A” victory (when the game number lottery end flag is in the OFF state), the AT game At the start, the number of AT start games when “woman A” wins is determined, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 determines that the “woman A” at the start of the AT game when the AT start game number (basic unit game number) is not determined in the transition effect game at the time of “woman A” victory. It also serves as means for determining the number of AT start games at the time of winning (second basic game number determining means).

[Process during BB_game start during AT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the AT-time BB_game start time process performed in S425 in the flowchart of the start command reception time process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is “0” (S841).

  In S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not “0” (when S841 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S843 described later. That is, when the current game is in a penalty, the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) in S842 described later is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB entry check flag (the process of shifting to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state where the pseudo BB game is not started occurs.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S841 that the number of penalty games is “0” (when S841 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB entry determination process (at the start of the game) described in FIG. Perform (S842).

  After the process of S842 or when S841 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 122 (S843). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB counter management process described with reference to FIG. 123 (S844).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the directly added lottery table (see FIGS. 47A and 47C) and performs an additional lottery process (directly added lottery process) for the number of AT games (S845). At this time, if the penalty flag is in the off state, the direct addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to. If the penalty flag is in the on state, the direct addition lottery (in FIG. 47C) Penalty flag ON: AT, AT BB) table is referenced. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value (number of added AT games) of the lottery result of the directly added lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S846).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small role related to “push order bell” (S847). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S848). Then, after the process of S848, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-time BB_game start process and moves the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  As described above, in the AT-time BB_game start process of the present embodiment, the number of AT games is added and lottery is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as means (second notification game addition means) for determining the addition number of the unit game number of AT games in the pseudo BB game.

[Game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the gaming state setting process performed in S427 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is “general” (S851).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S851 that the gaming state (current) is “general medium” (when S851 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a general medium_gaming state setting process (S852). Note that details of the general_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 described later. Then, after the processing of S852, the sub CPU 102 ends the gaming state setting process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S851, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “general” (when S851 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) “general BB”. Whether or not (S853).

  In S853, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general medium BB” (when S853 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium BB_gaming state setting processing (S854). Details of the general medium BB_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 described later. Then, after the processing of S854, the sub CPU 102 ends the gaming state setting processing and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S853 that the gaming state (current) is not “general medium BB” (when S853 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) “race”. Whether or not (S855).

  In S855, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “race” (when S855 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a racing_gaming state setting process (S856). The details of the in-race_gaming state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S856, the sub CPU 102 ends the gaming state setting processing and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S855 that the gaming state (current) is not “race” (when S855 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) “AT ready”. Whether or not (S857).

  In S857, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT ready” (when S857 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparing_game state setting processing (S858). . Details of the AT preparation_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134 described later. Then, after the processing of S858, the sub CPU 102 ends the gaming state setting processing and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, in S857, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “AT ready” (when S857 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT BB”. It is determined whether or not there is (S859).

  In S859, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT BB” (when S859 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an AT BB_gaming state setting process (S860). Details of the AT BB_gaming state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 135 described later. Then, after the processing of S860, the sub CPU 102 ends the gaming state setting processing and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S859 that the sub gaming state is not “AT BB” (when S859 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the gaming state setting process and receives a start command process. (See FIG. 96) also ends.

  Although not shown in FIG. 130, in the series of repeated processing of the sub gaming state determination process and the gaming state setting process described above during the gaming state setting process, the sub gaming state is actually “W chance”. A determination process for determining whether or not there is a game state setting process for “W Chance”, a determination process for determining whether or not the sub gaming state is “AT”, and a game state setting process for “AT” are also performed. .

[General_Game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the general medium_game state setting process performed in S852 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is “0” (S871).

  In S871, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not “0” (when S871 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S873 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S871 that the value of the cycle counter is “0” (when S871 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “in race” to the gaming state (next time) ( S872).

  After the processing of S872 or when S871 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (S873). In S873, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” (when S873 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process. (See FIG. 130) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S873, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (when S873 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the gaming state (next time) is “race”. It is determined whether or not (S874).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S874 that the gaming state (next time) is not “race” (when S874 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S876 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is “race” in S874 (when S874 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S875).

  After the processing of S875 or when S874 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is on (S876). In S876, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the on state (when S876 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S878 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S876 that the race occurrence flag is on (when S876 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” in the cycle counter (S877).

  After the processing of S877 or when S876 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets “general BB” in the gaming state (next time) (S878). Then, after the processing of S878, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[General BB_Game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the general medium BB_game state setting process performed in S854 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is “0” (S881). In S881, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not “0” (when S881 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process. (See FIG. 130) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S881 that the value of the BB game counter is “0” (when S881 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC” and JAC. It is determined whether or not the number of bell navigations is greater than “0” (S882). In S882, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S882 is satisfied (when S882 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S882 that the determination condition of S882 is not satisfied (when S882 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is in an on state (S883). .

  In S883, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not on (when S883 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets “general medium” to the gaming state (next time) (S884). Then, after the processing of S884, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_gaming state setting process and also ends the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S883 that the race occurrence flag is in the on state (when S883 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “in race” to the gaming state (next time) (S885). . Then, after the processing of S885, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_gaming state setting process and also ends the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[Race_Game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the in-race_gaming state setting process performed in S856 in the flowchart of the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is the tenth game (S891). In S891, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of racing games is not the tenth game (when S891 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process (FIG. 130) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S891 that the number of race games is the tenth game (when S891 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is on ( S892).

  In S892, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is not on (when S892 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets “general medium” to the gaming state (next time) (S893). Then, after the processing of S893, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_gaming state setting process and also ends the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S892 that the race victory flag is on (when S892 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is “0”. (S894).

  In S894, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” (when S894 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets “AT ready” to the gaming state (next time) (S895). ). Then, after the processing of S895, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_gaming state setting process and also ends the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, in S894, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” (when S894 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “BB during AT” to the gaming state (next time). (S896). Then, after the process of S896, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_gaming state setting process and also ends the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[AT preparation_game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the AT preparation_game state setting process performed in S858 in the flowchart of the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT entry flag is in an on state (S901). In S901, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT entry flag is not in the on state (when S901 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game state setting process and the game state setting process (FIG. 130) also ends.

  On the other hand, in S901, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT entry flag is in the on state (when S901 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “AT in progress” to the gaming state (next time) (S902). . Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” or more (S903).

  In S903, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not “0” or more (when S903 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S906 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S903 that the value of the BB precursor counter is “0” or more (when S903 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the BB precursor counter. (S904). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “AT BB” in the gaming state (next time) (S905).

  After the processing of S905 or when S903 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the “game number lottery end flag” (S906). The “game number lottery end flag” is a flag indicating whether or not to end the AT start game number determination game. Then, after the processing of S906, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[AT during BB_gaming state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the AT-in-AT BB_gaming state setting process performed in S860 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is “0” (S911). In S911, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not “0” (when S911 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-time BB_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process. (See FIG. 130) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S911 that the value of the BB game counter is “0” (when S911 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaJAC” and JAC. It is determined whether or not the number of bell navigation is greater than “0” (S912). In S912, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S912 is satisfied (when S912 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT BB_gaming state setting process and the gaming state setting process (see FIG. 130). ) Also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S912 that the determination condition in S912 is not satisfied (when S912 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is in an on state (S913). .

  In S913, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is in the on state (when S913 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “AT ready” in the gaming state (next time) (S914). Then, after the process of S914, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_gaming state setting process during AT and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S913 that the race victory flag is not in the on state (when S913 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the “addition challenge flag” is in the on state ( S915). The “addition challenge flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a game in the addition challenge state is executed. Although not shown, it is set in the AT preparation_game state setting process.

  In S915, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the add-on challenge flag is in the on state (when S915 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “addition challenge is in progress” to the game state (next time) (S916). Then, after the process of S916, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_gaming state setting process during AT and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S915 that the extra challenge flag is not in the on state (when S915 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets “AT in progress” to the gaming state (next time) (S917). Then, after the process of S917, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_gaming state setting process during AT and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[Reel stop command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the reel stop command reception process performed in S360 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a special processing condition is satisfied (S921). The “special processing condition” is a condition in which a penalty is not determined. Specifically, when the maximum number of medals that can be inserted is two, the gaming state is a state between 3 MB flags. Or if MB is in operation.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S921 that the special processing condition is satisfied (in the case where S921 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and also produces the effect content determination process (FIG. 91). And FIG. 92) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S921 that the special processing condition is not satisfied (when S921 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is a state other than the first stop. It is determined whether or not (S922).

  In S922, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is a state other than the first stop (when S922 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process, The effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S922, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current reel stop state is not a state other than the first stop (when S922 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the game state (current) “general”. It is determined whether or not (S923).

  In S923, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general medium” (when S923 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium penalty processing (S924). Details of the general medium penalty process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S924, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, in S923, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “general” (when S923 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “race”. It is determined whether or not (S925).

  In S925, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “race” (when S925 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (CT bell). Then, it is determined whether or not the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S926).

  In S926, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S926 is not satisfied (in the case where S926 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 91 and FIG. 91). 92) also ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S926 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S926 (when S926 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “5” to the number of penalty games and sets the penalty counter value to “1”. "Is added (S927).

  In the process of S927, when the number of penalty games after addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit value of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the number of penalty games. If the added penalty counter value exceeds “10” (upper limit value of the penalty counter value), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the penalty counter value. Then, after the process of S927, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  Here, returning to the processing of S925 again, in S925, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (currently) is not “race” (when S925 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the gaming state ( It is determined whether or not “current” is “general BB” or “AT BB” (S928).

  In S928, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “general BB” or “AT BB” (when S928 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB penalty processing ( S929). Details of the BB penalty process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138 described later. Then, after the process of S929, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S928 that the gaming state (current) is not “general BB” or “AT BB” (when S928 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current). It is determined whether or not “at AT” (S930).

  In S930, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “AT” (when S930 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and the effect content determination process. (See FIGS. 91 and 92) is also terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S930 that the gaming state (current) is “AT” (when S930 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is greater than “0”. Is discriminated (S931).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S931 that the number of penalty games is not greater than “0” (in the case where S931 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and the effect content determination process ( 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S931 that the penalty game number is greater than “0” (when S931 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the penalty game number (S932). Then, after the process of S932, the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[General penalty processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the general middle penalty process performed in S924 in the flowchart (see FIG. 136) of the reel stop command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (CT bell) and the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S941).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S941 that the determination condition of S941 is not satisfied (when S941 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (S942).

  In S942, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not greater than “0” (when S942 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium penalty process and the reel stop command reception process ( The process also ends (see FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S942 that the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (when S942 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the number of penalty games (S943). After the process of S943, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium penalty process and also ends the reel stop command reception process (see FIG. 136).

  Here, returning to the processing of S941 again, in S941, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S941 (when S941 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of penalty games to “5”. Then, “1” is added to the value of the penalty counter (S944). In this process, when the number of penalty games after addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit value of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the number of penalty games. If the added penalty counter value exceeds “10” (upper limit value of the penalty counter value), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the penalty counter value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a race winning rate data rewriting lottery process with reference to the race winning rate data rewriting (during penalty) table shown in FIG. 40 (S945). Note that when the lottery process is won (when the winning type is other than “no rewriting”), the race win rate data is rewritten so that the race win rate (AT win probability) of the current cycle is reduced as a penalty.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race win rate data rewriting lottery of S945 has been won (whether or not the winning type is other than “no rewriting”) (S946). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S946 that the race win rate data rewriting lottery has not been won (when S946 is NO), the sub CPU 102 terminates the general middle penalty process and processes a reel stop command reception process (FIG. 136) also ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S946 that the sub CPU 102 has won the race win rate data rewriting lottery (when S946 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the lottery result (in this embodiment, the race win rate is 0%). Is set (S947). Then, after the processing of S947, the sub CPU 102 ends the general medium penalty processing and also ends the reel stop command reception processing (see FIG. 136).

[BB penalty processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the BB penalty process performed in S929 in the flowchart of the reel stop command reception process (see FIG. 136) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is greater than “0” (S951).

  In S951, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not greater than “0” (when S951 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S953 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S951 that the penalty game number is greater than “0” (when S951 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the penalty game number (S952).

  After the processing of S952 or when S951 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “waiting for BB operation” (S953).

  In step S953, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “waiting for BB operation” (in the case where S953 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty processing during BB and also performs processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command ( The process also ends (see FIG. 136). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S953 that the pseudo BB state is “BB operation wait” (when S953 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is greater than “0” or a penalty. It is determined whether or not the flag is on (S954).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S954 that the determination condition in S954 is not satisfied (in the case where S954 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty process during the BB and receives a reel stop command reception process (see FIG. 136). ) Also ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S954 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S954 (when S954 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is “push order bell” (CT bell), and It is determined whether or not the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S955).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S955 that the determination condition in S955 is not satisfied (in the case where S955 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty process during BB and also receives a reel stop command reception process (see FIG. 136). ) Also ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S955 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S955 (when S955 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “5” to the number of penalty games (S956). In this process, when the number of penalty games after addition exceeds “10” (the upper limit value of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets “10” as the number of penalty games.

  Then, after the processing of S956, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB penalty processing and also ends the reel stop command reception processing (see FIG. 136).

[Process when receiving a winning action command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the winning action command reception process performed in S362 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub game state is a time of winning a “general medium BB” (hereinafter referred to as “general medium BB_winning time”) (S961).

  In S961, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “general medium BB_winning” (when S961 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs general medium BB_winning processing (S962). The details of the general medium BB_winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140 described later. After the process of S962, the sub CPU 102 ends the winning action command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S961 that the sub gaming state is not “general medium BB_winning” (when S961 is NO), the sub CPU 102 receives the winning when the sub gaming state is “race” (in the case of racing). Hereinafter, it is determined whether or not it is “during race_winning” (S963).

  In S963, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is “during racing_winning” (when S963 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing during racing_winning (S964). Details of the process during the race_winning will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S964, the sub CPU 102 ends the process upon receiving the winning action command and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

  On the other hand, in S963, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not “during race_winning” (when S963 is NO), the sub CPU 102 wins when the sub gaming state is “AT BB”. (Hereinafter referred to as “in-AT BB_winning time”) is determined (S965). In S965, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not “AT during BB_winning” (when S965 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the winning operation command receiving process and determines the contents of the effect. The processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S965 that the sub gaming state is “at BB_winning during AT” (when S965 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing during BB_winning during AT (S966). . Details of the AT BB_winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 144 described later. After the process of S966, the sub CPU 102 ends the winning action command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[General BB_winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the general medium BB_winning process performed in S962 in the flowchart (see FIG. 139) of the winning operation command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB entry determination process (at the time of winning a prize) (S971). The details of the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning a prize) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning a prize) (S972). Details of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning a prize) will be described later with reference to FIG. 142 described later. Then, after the processing of S972, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_winning process and the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 139).

[BB entry determination process (when winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S971 in the flowchart (see FIG. 140) of the general middle BB_winning process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB entry check flag is on (S981). In S981, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not in an on state (when S981 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning), and the process is in general BB_winning. The process proceeds to S972 in the time process (see FIG. 140).

  On the other hand, in S981, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is on (when S981 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry check flag off (S982).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the player has pressed the stop button in accordance with the stop button pressing order navigation notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 when the pseudo BB game enters (hereinafter referred to as “BB entry navigation”). (S983).

  In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is “normal lip 1” or “normal lip 3”, the order of “middle right” is notified as the order of pressing the stop button. When the internal winning combination is “normal lip 2” or “normal lip 4”, the order of “right middle left” is notified as the stop button pressing order. When the internal winning combination is “normal lip 5” or “normal lip 7”, the order of “middle left and right” is notified as the pressing order of the stop button. Further, when the internal winning combination is “normal lip 6” or “normal lip 8”, the order of “middle right left” is notified as the pressing order of the stop button.

  In S983, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has followed the BB entry navigation (when S983 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB entry flag (S984). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S985). Then, after the process of S985, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning) and moves the process to S972 of the general medium BB_winning process (see FIG. 140).

  On the other hand, in S983, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has not followed the BB entry navigation (when S983 is NO), that is, when the BB entry navigation is ignored, the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is It is determined whether or not it is “0” (S986).

  In S986, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not “0” (in the case where S986 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning), and the process is BB_winning in general. The process proceeds to S972 in the time process (see FIG. 140). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S986 that the number of penalty games is “0” (in the case where S986 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the penalty flag on (S987). Then, after the process of S987, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning), and moves the process to S972 of the general medium BB_winning process (see FIG. 140).

[BBJAC transition determination process (when winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S972 in the general BB_winning time process flowchart (see FIG. 140) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC inrush check flag is on (S991). In S991, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush check flag is not on (when S991 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S998 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S991 that the BARJAC rush check flag is on (when S991 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BAR JAC rush check flag off (S992). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “BB in progress” (S993).

  In S993, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “BB” (when S993 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S997 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S993 that the pseudo BB state is not “BB” (when S993 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB”. (S994).

  In S994, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not “ChaBB” (when S994 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S998 described below. On the other hand, in S994, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is “ChaBB in progress” (when S994 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is “BAR Rip”. It is determined whether or not (S995). The winning combination “BAR lip” corresponds to “bell lip 3” or “bell lip 4”.

  In S995, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is “BAR Lip” (when S995 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S997 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S995 that the display combination (winning combination) is not “BAR lip” (when S995 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) “AT BB”. It is determined whether or not there is (S996).

  In S996, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is “AT BB” (when S996 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S997 described later. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S996 that the gaming state (current) is not “AT BB” (when S996 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S998 described later.

  If S993, S995, or S996 is YES, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC entry flag (S997).

  After the processing of S997, or when S991, S994, or S996 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S998). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) in S998 (when S998 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning). The general medium BB_winning process (see FIG. 140) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S998 that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when S998 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC entry flag is on. Is discriminated (S999). In S999, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC rush flag is not on (when S999 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) and the general medium BB_winning process. (See FIG. 140) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S999 that the BARJAC rush flag is on (in the case where S999 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the gaming state (current) to the gaming state (next time) (S1000). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the value of the BB game counter (S1001). Then, after the processing of S1001, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) and also ends the general BB_winning time process (see FIG. 140).

[Process during race_winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the in-race_winning process performed in S964 in the flowchart (see FIG. 139) of the winning operation command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB entry check flag is on (S1011). In S1011, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not on (when S1011 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_winning process and receives a winning operation command reception process ( Also, see FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, in S1011, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is on (when S1011 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry check flag off (S1012).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop button pressing order by the player is a predetermined order (whether or not the pressing order is correct) (S1013).

  In S1013, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button pressing order by the player is not a predetermined order (when S1013 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns the penalty flag on (S1014). Then, after the processing of S1014, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_winning process and also ends the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 139).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1013 that the stop button pressing order by the player is a predetermined order (when S1013 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB entry flag (S1015). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “AT BB” in the gaming state (next time) (S1016). After the processing of S1016, the sub CPU 102 ends the in-race_winning process and also ends the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 139).

[AT BB_winning process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the AT-time BB_winning process performed in S966 in the flowchart (see FIG. 139) of the winning operation command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning a prize) described in FIG. 141 (S1021). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning a prize) described in FIG. 142 (S1022). Then, after the processing of S1022, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT-time BB_winning process and also ends the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 139).

[Processing upon receipt of withdrawal command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the payout end command reception process performed in S364 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (the gaming state managed by the main CPU 93) is a non-MB state (S1031).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1031 that the gaming state is the non-MB state (when S1031 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the credit number of medals is “3” or more ( S1032).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1032 that the credit number of medals is not "3" or more (in the case where S1032 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the payout end command reception process and effects content determination process ( 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1032 that the credit number of medals is “3” or more (when S1032 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1034 described later.

  Here, the process returns to S1031 again. In S1031, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not the non-MB state (when S1031 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the medal credit number is “2”. It is determined whether or not it is greater than or equal to (S1033).

  In S1033, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of medals is not “2” or more (when S1033 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the payout end command reception process and the effect content determination process ( 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1033 that the credit number of medals is “2” or more (when S1033 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing of S1034 described later.

  When S1032 or S1033 is YES, the sub CPU 102 issues a lighting request to the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S1034). Then, after the processing of S1034, the sub CPU 102 ends the payout end command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the no-operation command reception process performed in S374 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 is provided in the sub RAM 103 with status information (for example, on / off information of the BET switch 77, the start switch 79, etc.) of the input port of each operation unit included in the received no-operation command data. Save in the input port state storage area (S1041). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current state is after receiving the payout end command and before receiving the medal insertion command (S1042).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1042 that the determination condition of S1042 is not satisfied (in the case where S1042 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and the effect content determination process (see FIG. 91 and FIG. 91). 92) also ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1042 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S1042 (when S1042 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (currently) is “AT ready”. (S1043).

  In S1043, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not “AT ready” (when S1043 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and determines the contents of the effect. The processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1043 that the gaming state (current) is “AT ready” (when S1043 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing when the AT preparing button is pressed (S1044). ). In this process, an AT start game number determination process at the time of “woman A” victory and an AT start game number determination game revival lottery process at the time of “Kappa” victory are performed. Details of the process when the AT preparation button is pressed will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the process of S1044, the sub CPU 102 ends the no-operation command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[Processing when the AT preparation button is pressed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a description will be given of the AT preparation button pressing process performed in S1044 in the flowchart of the no-operation command reception process (see FIG. 146).

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 21 is pressed by the player and the race winner is “Kappa” (S1051).

  In S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1051 is satisfied (when S1051 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process when the Kappa wins_MAX bet button is pressed (S1052). In this process, a rebirth lottery of an AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory is performed. Then, after the process of S1052, the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the AT preparation button is pressed and also ends the process when the no-operation command is received (see FIG. 146).

  On the other hand, in S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1051 is not satisfied (when S1051 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the selection button 25 (chance button) is pressed by the player and the race is performed. It is determined whether or not the winner is “woman A” (S1053).

  In S1053, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1053 is satisfied (when S1053 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs switching processing of the AT start game number lottery table (S1054).

  In the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “female A” victory, as described above, as the mode for determining the number of AT start games (decision mode), the first mode (the continuation probability is 50%, the addition for each MAX bet operation) The number of games is 50) and the second mode (the continuation probability is 95%, and the number of added games for each MAX bet operation is 5) is prepared. In the process of S1054, the AT start game number lottery table (one of FIGS. 48A and 48B) corresponding to the currently set one mode is changed from the AT start game number lottery table (female A victory) corresponding to the other mode. Hour) Switch to the table (the other of FIGS. 48A and 48B).

  For example, in the situation where the currently set AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table is the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table (FIG. 48B) corresponding to the second mode, When the selection button 25 (chance button) is pressed by the user, the AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) table (FIG. 48A) corresponding to the first mode is changed to “female A” by the switching process in S1054. Set as an AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table used in the AT start game number determination game at the time of victory. Then, after the process of S1054, the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the AT preparation button is pressed, and also ends the process when the no-operation command is received (see FIG. 146).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1053 that the determination condition of S1053 is not satisfied (when S1053 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the MAX bet button 21 is pressed by the player and the race winner is It is determined whether or not it is “female A” (S1055).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1055 that the determination condition of S1055 is not satisfied (in the case of NO determination in S1055), the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the AT preparation button is pressed and performs the process when the no-operation command is received ( Also, see FIG. 146).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1055 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S1055 (when S1055 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a female A_AT start game number determination process (S1056). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games when “woman A” wins. The details of the female A_AT start game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the processing of S1056, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed and also ends the processing when the no-operation command is received (see FIG. 146).

  As described above, in the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed according to the present embodiment, when the MAX bet button 21 is pressed by the player and the race winner is “female A”, “female A”. The number of AT start games at the time of victory is determined, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 determines means for determining the number of AT start games (first basic game) by pressing the MAX bet button 21 when the race winner is “woman A”. Number determination means).

[Female A_AT start game decision process]
148. Next, referring to FIG. 148, in S827 in the flowchart of AT-initiated game start processing (see FIG. 128), or in S1056 in the flowchart of processing of button preparation during AT preparation (see FIG. 147). The A_AT start game determination process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number-of-games lottery end flag is in an off state (S1061).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1061 that the game number lottery end flag is not in the off state (when S1061 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process and the female A_AT start game determination process. When the call destination is the AT-in-game start process (see FIG. 128), the process proceeds to S826 in the AT-in-game start process. If the calling destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the process when the AT preparation button is pressed (see FIG. 147) and S1061 is NO, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process. At the same time, the process when the AT preparation button is pressed ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1061 that the game number lottery end flag is in the OFF state (when S1061 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the AT start game number lottery table (see FIGS. 48A and 48B). The female A_AT start game number lottery process is performed (S1062). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the female A_AT start game number lottery of S1062 has been won (S1063).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1063 that the female A_AT start game number lottery has been won (when S1063 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines a predetermined number of games (5 games or 50 games) corresponding to the lottery result. Then, it is added to the currently determined number of AT start games (S1064). Then, after the process of S1064, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process, and when the call destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is an AT-in-game start process (see FIG. 128), The process moves to S826 in AT-in-game start process. If the calling destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the process when the AT preparation button is pressed (see FIG. 147), the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process after the process of S1064, Processing when the AT preparation button is pressed is also ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1063 that the sub CPU 102 has not won the female A_AT start game number lottery (NO in S1063), the sub CPU 102 turns the game number lottery end flag on (S1065). Then, after the process of S1065, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process, and when the call destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is an AT-in-game start process (see FIG. 128), The process moves to S826 in AT-in-game start process. Further, when the calling destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the process when the AT preparation button is pressed (see FIG. 147), after the process of S1065, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process and Processing when the AT preparation button is pressed is also ended.

<Various effects>
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the following various effects are obtained in the game playability.

[Various effects obtained in games between 2MB flags]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the RT1 (high RT) gaming state in which the bonus “2 MB” for winning and winning only in the case of a two-player game is carried over, that is, in the state between 2 MB flags, a predetermined number of games (190 Various games such as a non-AT game (a normal game and a transition effect game) with a game) as one cycle and an AT game with a specific number of games are performed. In the game in the state between the 2 MB flags, the suggestion of three cards is performed, and as long as the player plays the game of three cards according to the suggestion, the game can be performed without winning the bonus “2 MB”. In addition, as long as the player plays three games in the state between the 2 MB flags, the lottery table in which the establishment and winning of the bonus “2 MB” is not referenced is referred to, so the bonus “2 MB” performs any stop operation. So that no prizes are received.

  Also, in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal game, when a “losing” or a specific internal winning combination (small role or replaying combination) is won once or continuously won, a non-AT game period (normal A lottery (cycle shortening lottery) for shortening the number of games in a game period) is performed. If this cycle shortening lottery is won, the game period of the current set in the non-AT state is shortened, and the period until the transition to the AT state can be shortened. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when “losing” or a predetermined internal winning combination (replay combination) is won once in an AT game, or when a consecutive winning combination is made, an additional lottery (directly added lottery) is added. When the bonus lottery is performed, the number of remaining AT games increases.

  That is, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in a game in a high RT game state in which a bonus is carried over, even if the internal winning combination becomes “losing”, it is possible to continue an advantageous game without winning a bonus. . Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the privilege given at the time of “losing” is varied according to the type of the sub gaming state (“normal state” or “AT state”) in the high RT gaming state during the bonus carryover. be able to.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give a game value to “losing” that occurs in a game in a high RT gaming state during bonus carryover, and it is possible to widen the range of games. In addition, in a game in a high RT game state in which a bonus is carried over, “losing” in which a bonus is not won can be appropriately generated, so that gambling of the gaming machine can be maintained. From the above, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's interest in games in a high RT gaming state during bonus carryover.

  Further, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, in a game between 2 MB flags, when the total number of credits and inserted medals of the current medal is less than 3, the player performs a MAX bet operation. However, the MAX bet operation becomes invalid. In this case, in the state between the 2 MB flags, the double betting game by the MAX bet operation is not started, and the winning of the bonus “2 MB” being carried over can be avoided more reliably.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the state between the 2 MB flags, a game with the number of medals to be disadvantageous to the player cannot be performed by the MAX bet operation. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, even a player who does not have game knowledge can play a game with peace of mind.

[Various effects obtained by lottery shortening of regular games]
In the present embodiment, as a result of subtracting the number of remaining games of the current game of the current set by the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery performed during the normal game, the subtraction result is less than a predetermined number of games (10 games). If it becomes, the surplus number of shortened games corresponding to the subtraction result is stocked. Then, the stocked number of shortened games is applied as the number of shortened games in the next set. In this case, from the start of the next set, the game is played in a state where the game period of the non-AT state is shortened.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the normal game of the next set can be applied to the normal game of the next set without wasting the number of shortened games (privileges) surplus in the current set without wasting it. A player's interest in games can be given. Further, in this case, since a motive for causing the player to execute the next set of normal games can be generated, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

[Various effects obtained by pseudo BB game]
As described above, the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment includes a pseudo BB game in which the payout of medals increases, and when a pseudo BB lottery is won in a normal game or an AT game, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. The Therefore, the normal game is not a game that simply digests the game, but a game in which more medals can be obtained by the pseudo BB game.

  In the present embodiment, in the pseudo BB game started during the normal game, even when “losing” or “rare role” is won internally, the period of the non-AT game period (the game period of the normal game) A shortened lottery is performed. Then, when the subtraction result is less than “0” as a result of subtracting the remaining number of games of the normal game of the current set by the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery at this time, the surplus corresponding to the subtraction result The number of shortened games in minutes is stocked. Then, the stocked number of shortened games is applied as the number of shortened games in the next set.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game started during the AT game, when “losing” or “rare role” is won internally, an extra lottery (directly over lottery) is performed and the extra lottery is won. In this case, the current number of remaining AT games increases.

  In other words, in the pseudo BB game, the privilege given to the winning of “losing” or “rare role” according to the type of the sub gaming state (“normal state” or “AT state”) at the start of the pseudo BB game. The contents of can be different. Furthermore, even in the pseudo BB game, a game value can be given to “losing”. Therefore, in this embodiment, the interest with respect to the pseudo BB game can be improved.

  In addition, in the AT game in the state between the 2 MB flags, not only a game for notifying the player of the internal winning small role is performed, but also a pseudo BB game may be started. It is possible to prevent the AT game from becoming a monotonous game.

[Various effects that can be obtained from the game to determine the number of games starting AT when Kappa wins]
In the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of “Kappa” victory of this embodiment, as described above, the character “Kappa” is eaten in sequence according to the type of internal winning combination, The number of AT start games is determined in accordance with the type of sushi material eaten. That is, in the game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of winning “Kappa”, the number of basic stay games in the AT state (number of AT start games) is not determined by one lottery, but over a plurality of games. It is determined based on the type of the internal winning combination and the sushi material (game information) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the interest of the player with respect to the game for acquiring the number of games in the AT state (AT start game number determination game).

  In addition, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of “Kappa” victory of this embodiment, as described above, the sushi story data (game information) after the next game is stored even if the internal winning combination is “Lost”. There is a possibility that it will be converted into better data for the player. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give a game value to “losing” even in the AT start game number determination game, and to maintain interest even when “losing” is determined.

<Various modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and for example, the following various modifications can be considered.

[Modification 1]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment, when “losing” is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game (one time or in succession), the game period (the number of stay games) in the normal state is shortened (cycle reduction). May be obtained. In the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment, when “losing” is won in an AT game, there is a possibility that a benefit of adding the number of AT games is obtained.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a function for granting a privilege by winning a “losing” (single or consecutive winnings) is also provided in a game in a sub game state other than a normal game, a pseudo BB game, and an AT game. May be. In the first modification, therefore, a pachislot machine having a function of obtaining a benefit of AT winning when “losing” is won in the transition effect game (race effect) will be described.

(1) Race_Loss lottery table First, with reference to FIG. 149, the race_Loss lottery table necessary for executing the above-described privilege (AT winning) grant function in the transition effect game (race effect) will be described. To do. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the lottery table during race_losing. In addition, the lottery table during race_losing is determined by, for example, winning / non-winning of the race win in the lottery processing during race_losing during the race (see FIG. 150 described later) (see FIG. 150 described later) (S1118). This is referred to when determining whether the AT game is won or not.

  The lottery table during race_losing defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning of the race win and the lottery value for each value of the lose counter (“1” to “4”). The lose counter is a counter that manages (counts) the number of consecutive “loses” in the race performance period (10 games).

  Therefore, for example, when “losing” is won three times in succession during a race performance, the value of the losing counter is “3”. In this case, the player wins the race with a probability of 6554/32768, and wins the race with the probability of 26214/32768 (race victory flag ON). When the value of the loss counter is “1” (when the first “losing” is won), the winning of the race is always non-winning (AT non-winning).

(2) Process during Race_Game Start Next, a process during race_game start in Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the in-race_game start process in this example is also performed in S419 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the start command reception process in the above embodiment.

  Further, in this example, processes other than the process at the start of the race_game by the sub control circuit 101 are the same as in the above embodiment. Therefore, only the process at the start of the race_game will be described here.

  As is clear from the comparison of the flowchart of the process at the start of the game shown in FIG. 150 and the flowchart of the process at the start of the game of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 124 as shown in FIG. The processes from S1101 to S1114 in the game start process flowchart are the same as the processes from S741 to S754 in the in-race_game start process flowchart of the above embodiment. Therefore, description of the processing from S1101 to S1114 is omitted here.

  In this example, after the processing of S1114 or when S1112 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the race result lottery is non-winning of the race win and the internal winning combination is “losing”. (S1115).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1115 that the determination condition of S1115 is not satisfied (when S1115 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” in the loss counter (S1116). Then, after the process of S1116, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1121 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S1115 that the sub CPU 102 satisfies the determination condition of S1115 (when S1115 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the loss counter (S1117). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the lottery table during race_losing (see FIG. 149), and performs lottery processing during race_out of race based on the value of the lost counter after the addition (S1118).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the lottery process during losing during the race is non-winning of the race victory (S1119). In S1119, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the lottery process during race_losing is non-winning of the race win (when S1119 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1121 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1119 that the result of the lottery process during the race_losing is not a win of the race win (when S1119 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race win flag. (S1120). Then, after the process of S1120, the sub CPU 102 performs a process of S1121 described later.

  After the process of S1116 or S1120, or when S1119 is YES, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a push order navigation lottery process of a small role related to “push order bell” (S1121 ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the push order navigation lottery process to “push order navigation number” (S1122). Then, after the process of S1122, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the race_game start, and moves the process to S426 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96).

  In the pachislot of Modification 1 described above, the same effects as in the above embodiment can be obtained, and even in the transition effect state (during the period of the race effect), a game value can be given to “losing”, It is possible to improve the interest in the transition effect game. In the first modification, when “losing” is won once (in the case where the value of the losing counter is “1”), the non-winning of the race victory is always determined. However, the present invention may be configured such that a winning of the race victory can be obtained with a predetermined probability even when “losing” is won once.

[Modification 2]
In the modified example 2, as in the modified example 1, when the “losing” is won in the transition effect game (race effect) (when the player wins once or continuously), the pachislot having the function of obtaining the benefit of AT winning is obtained. Will be described. However, in this example, the lottery form of AT lottery performed at the time of “losing” is different from that of the first modification.

  Specifically, in this example, not only the winning / non-winning of the race win but also the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the normal game set (cycle) according to the value of the lost counter (see FIG. 35). It is also possible to select a re-lottery of the race win rate using. Therefore, the configuration of the in-race lottery table used in this example is different from that of the first modification.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 151, the lottery table during race_losing in the second modification will be described. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a configuration of the lottery table during _losing in this example. Also in this example, the lottery table during race_losing is referred to, for example, in the lottery processing during race_losing during game start processing (S1118) in the first modification described in FIG. The

  In this example, the lottery table during _losing shows the lottery result type (winning / non-winning of the race victory and re-lotting of the race winning rate) for each value of the lost counter (“1” to “3”). Define the correspondence with lottery values. In this example as well, the value of the lose counter indicates the number of consecutive wins for “losing” during the race performance period (10 games).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 151, when the value of the lose counter is “1”, the winning of the race victory is always obtained as the lottery result. When the value of the lose counter is “2”, a re-lottery of the race win rate is always obtained as a lottery result. If the value of the lose counter is “3”, the winning of the race is always obtained as the lottery result.

  In this example, the value of the lost counter is “2” in the lottery process during the race_losing during the game start process shown in FIG. 150 (S1118), and if the player has won the lottery again. The sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the set in the processing of S1118, and performs lottery of the race win rate data based on the set value.

  This example is configured in the same manner as the first modification except that the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of “losing” is different from the first modification. Therefore, also in Modification 2, the same effect as in Modification 1 can be obtained. In the second modification, an example in which a non-winning race is always determined when “losing” is internally won once (when the loss counter value is “1”) has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and even when “losing” is won once, at least one of the winning of the re-lotting of the race winning rate and the winning of the race winning may be obtained with a predetermined probability.

[Modification 3]
In the first and second modified examples, the pachislot having the function of obtaining the benefit of winning AT is described when “losing” is won in the transition effect game (race effect) (when the game is won once or continuously). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the transition effect game, when “losing” is won, another privilege may be given. For example, when “losing” is won in a transition effect game (one time or continuously winning), a game of “addition challenge state” in which a pseudo BB game is won and stocked with a high probability over a predetermined number of games. May be stocked.

  In this case, the game of “addition challenge state” stocked during the transition effect game (race effect) has a specific symbol combination (“yellow BAR” − “yellow BAR” − “yellow BAR”) after the transition to the AT state. Stopped on the active line and started.

  In the configuration of this example, the game after the transition to the AT state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the difference in gameability (game advantage) between the AT state and other states is increased. Can do. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and other states can be sharpened, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

[Modification 4]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the above embodiment, when “losing” is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game (one time or in succession), the game period (the number of stay games) in the normal state is shortened (cycle reduction). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the normal game or the pseudo BB game, when “losing” is won (when the game is won once or continuously), the cycle shortened lottery may not be performed.

  In this case, the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table used in this example is the cycle shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 44 and 45) and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (see FIG. 46) of the above embodiment. ), The field defining the lottery value related to “losing” is deleted.

  As in this example, in a normal game or a simulated BB game, when a “losing” is won, a benefit is not given to the game between the AT state and other states (advantage of the game) The difference can be increased. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and other states can be sharpened, and the fun of the game can be further improved.

[Modification 5]
In the pachislot of the above-described embodiment or the above-described various modifications, a configuration has been described in which a predetermined privilege is given at the time of “losing” in a plurality of types of sub-games, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of sub-games Only in one sub gaming state of the gaming state, a privilege giving function at the time of “losing” winning may be provided.

  Heretofore, the configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the present invention have been described including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and includes various other embodiments and modifications without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. Further, in the above-described embodiment and modifications, a pachislot machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine called “pachinko”. The effect is obtained.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display device, 19L ... left stop button, 19C ... middle stop button, 19R ... right stop button, 20 ... medal slot, 21 ... MAX bet button, 23 ... start lever, 25 ... selection button, 51 ... hopper device, 53 ... power supply device, 55 ... Main control board case, 57 ... Sub control board case, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 91 ... Main control circuit, 93 ... Main CPU, 101 ... Sub control circuit, 102 ... Sub CPU

Claims (2)

An operation related to the progress of the game and a main control unit for controlling the operation;
A plurality of effect devices capable of notifying the player of information relating to the game and a circuit for controlling the effect devices, and a sub-control unit for effecting the game,
The main control unit
An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
A variable display device that is configured by a plurality of display rows and displays a symbol necessary for a game based on detection of a start operation by the start operation detection unit;
A data transmission means for controlling the variation display operation of the symbol by the variation display device, and transmitting data as the game progresses,
Predetermined game control means for controlling an operation of a game performed in a predetermined game state that is triggered by a predetermined internal winning combination being determined by the internal winning combination determination means,
The sub-control unit
Sub-control means for receiving data transmitted from the data transmission means, determining a game effect based on the received data, and controlling the operation of the determined effect;
Informing means for informing information for displaying a combination of symbols that gives a state advantageous to the player on the determination line straddling the plurality of display columns,
The sub-control means is
A notification game control means for controlling an operation of a notification game in which notification is performed by the notification means over a period of a specific number of unit games in the predetermined game state;
When a specific condition is established in the predetermined game state, the notification means notifies the information for displaying on the determination line a combination of symbols corresponding to a prescribed internal winning combination related to the payout of the game medium. Special game control means for controlling the operation of the special game for each unit game to determine whether or not to perform the specific game in which the game is continued until the specified number of times is executed a specific number of times,
In the waiting state for operation of the special game, notification game number addition determining means for determining whether or not to add the number of unit games of the notification game;
Penalty flag setting means for setting a penalty flag to an on state when an unauthorized operation is detected,
When the penalty flag is in the on state, the probability that the notification game number addition determining means determines the addition of the number of unit games of the notification game is lower than that in the case where the penalty flag is in the off state. A gaming machine characterized by that. The notification game number addition determining means determines whether to add the number of unit games of the notification game using a lottery table,
The lottery table used by the notification game number addition determining means when the penalty flag is in an on state is provided separately from the lottery table used when the penalty flag is in an off state. Item 1. A gaming machine according to Item 1.

Images